2019-acadia.pdf - Owners Manual - Dealer E Process

2019 Acadia/Acadia Denali

Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner’s Manual

84139730 Agmc.com (U.S.)gmccanada.ca (Canada)

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_GMC_Acadia_AcadiaDenali_COV_en_US_84139730A_2018APR13.ai 1 4/4/2018 1:02:16 PM19_GMC_Acadia_AcadiaDenali_COV_en_US_84139730A_2018APR13.ai 1 4/4/2018 1:02:16 PM

GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-12146149) - 2019 - crc - 3/27/18

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 28

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 118

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 173

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 205

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 373

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 390

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 400

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, ACADIA, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Company” forGMC wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner’s manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84139730 A First Printing ©2018 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’smanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. See thefeatures in this manual forinformation.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

+ : Fuses

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist


4 Introduction

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Start/Stop

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . 13Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 13Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Passenger Sensing System . . . 14Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 15Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 17Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 19Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 19Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Driver Information

Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Forward Automatic

Braking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . 22Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . 22Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 23Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Universal Remote System . . . . . 24Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/Electronic

Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 25Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 26Driving for Better Fuel

Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Roadside Assistance

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 203.

2. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.

Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 168.

3. Instrument Cluster 0 127.

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer0 120.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer0 121.

5. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 167.

6. Infotainment 0 173.

7. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 198.

8. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 64 (If Equipped).

9. USB Port 0 181 (If Equipped).

Auxiliary Input Jack. SeeAuxiliary Devices 0 187.

10. Hazard Warning Flashers0 168.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 236.

11. Power Outlets 0 124.

12. Driver Mode Control 0 239.

Assistance Systems forParking or Backing 0 253 (IfEquipped).

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 266(If Equipped).

13. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 229.

14. ENGINE START/STOP Button.See Starting the Engine 0 223.

15. Steering Wheel Controls 0 119(If Equipped).

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons.See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base and Midlevel)0 145 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 148.

16. Horn 0 120.

17. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 119.

18. Cruise Control 0 240.

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 243(If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 257 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 120(If Equipped).

19. Hood Release. See Hood0 287.

20. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 169 (Out of View).

21. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 136.

22. Electric Parking Brake 0 234.


8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Stop/Start SystemIf equipped, the Stop/Start systemwill shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. It has componentsdesigned for the increased numberof starts.

When the brakes are applied andthe vehicle is at a complete stop,the engine may turn off. Whenstopped, the tachometer displaysAUTO STOP. See Tachometer0 131. When the brake pedal isreleased or the accelerator pedal ispressed, the engine will restart. SeeStop/Start System 0 224 in Drivingand Operating.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may be used to lock andunlock the doors from up to 60 m(197 ft) away from the vehicle.

With Remote Start Shown

Press the key release button nearthe bottom of the transmitter toremove the key. Never pull the keyout without pressing the button. Thekey can be used for the driver door.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors depending on thevehicle personalization settings.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator.

Press and hold 7 for three secondsto sound the panic alarm. Pressagain to cancel the panic alarm.

b : Press twice quickly to open orclose the liftgate. Press once to stopthe liftgate from moving.

See Keys 0 28 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.


In Brief 9

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 35.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe outside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. Use the key. The key lockcylinder is covered with a cap.See Door Locks 0 37.

To lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside, use the power door lockswitch.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

Keyless Access

If equipped, press the button on thedriver door handle when the RKEtransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of thedriver door handle. When unlockingfrom the driver door, the first pressunlocks that door; press againwithin five seconds to unlock allpassenger doors. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.


10 In Brief

Liftgate

To unlock the liftgate, press K onthe power door lock switch or pressK on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter twice to unlock alldoors. Press the touch pad on thebottom of the liftgate and lift up. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

If equipped with a power liftgate, theswitch is on the driver door. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power liftgate mode byselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8.The driver door must be unlocked.On the RKE transmitter pressbtwice quickly until the liftgate startsmoving.

Press any liftgate button or thetouch pad while the liftgate ismoving to stop it. Pressing againreverses the direction.

To close, pressl on the bottomof the liftgate next to the pull cup.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, select OFF on the liftgateswitch. See Liftgate 0 41.

Windows

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 226.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.


In Brief 11

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

1. Seat Adjustment Handle2. Driver Seat Height

Adjustment Lever3. Seatback Lever

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (1) under theseat to unlock it.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition, and then release thehandle (1).

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Move the lever (2) up or down toraise or lower the seat.

Use the lever (3) to adjust theseatback.

See Seat Adjustment 0 58 andReclining Seatbacks 0 59.

Power Seats

1. Seat Adjustment Control2. Seatback Control3. Lumbar Control

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding thecontrol (1) forward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control (1) upor down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control (1)up or down.

. Adjust the seatback by tilting thetop of the control (2) forward orrearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 59.

. Press and hold the control (3)forward to increase or rearwardto decrease support.

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 59.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 59.


12 In Brief

Memory Features

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall theirunique seat positions for driving thevehicle, and a shared exit positionfor getting out of the vehicle. Otherfeature positions may also besaved, such as power mirrors andpower steering wheel, if equipped.Memory positions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press andrelease SET; a beep will sound.

Then immediately press and hold 1,2, orB (Exit) until two beepssound. To manually recall thesepositions, press and hold 1, 2, orBuntil the saved position is reached.

When Auto Memory Recall isenabled in vehicle personalization,positions previously saved tomemory buttons 1 and 2 arerecalled when the ignition ischanged from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.

When Easy Exit Options is enabledin vehicle personalization, thefeature automatically recalls thepreviously saved exit position whenexiting the vehicle.

Memory adjustments may not beavailable upon delivery or afterservice until steps in “SavingMemory Positions” section areperformed. See Memory Seats 0 61.

Second Row Seats

The second row seat can be foldedto access the third row. Pull thehandle on top of the seat forwardand pull the seat forward.

The second row seatbacks can befolded forward. See Rear Seats0 66.

Third Row SeatsThe third row seatbacks can befolded forward. See Third RowSeats 0 70.


In Brief 13

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+, if available, to heatthe driver or passengerseatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger cushion and seatback.

Press C or {, if available, toventilate the driver or passengerseat. A ventilated seat has a fanthat pulls or pushes air through theseat. The air is not cooled.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the front heated seats areon high, the level may automaticallybe lowered after approximately30 minutes.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 64.

The heated and ventilated frontseats can also be programmed tocome on during a remote start. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints 0 56 and SeatAdjustment 0 58.


14 In Brief

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 71

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 72

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 74

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 99

Passenger SensingSystem

United States and Canada

Mexico

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 85.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 135.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

If equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, the mirror willautomatically reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror 0 50.


In Brief 15

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust a mirror:

1. Press} or| to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

See Power Mirrors 0 49.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Power Tilt and TelescopingSteering Wheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.



16 In Brief

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The dome lamp is in the overheadconsole.

To operate, press the followingbuttons:

j OFF : Press to turn off thedome lamps when a door is open.An indicator light on the button willturn on when the dome lampoverride is activated. PressjOFF again to deactivate this feature

and the indicator light will turn off.The dome lamps will come on whendoors are opened.

+ ON/OFF : Press to turn the domelamps on manually.

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps on the overhead console andin the headliner. These lamps comeon when any door is opened.

Front Reading Lamps

Press the lamp lenses to turn thefront reading lamps on or off.

Rear Reading Lamps

Press the buttons to turn the rearpassenger reading lamps on or off.

For more information on interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 169.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.


In Brief 17

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns the exterior lamps off anddeactivates the AUTO mode. Turnto O again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.

. Turn and Lane-Change Signals0 168.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the lever toselect the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

INT : Move the windshield wiperlever to INT. Turn the band up formore frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

f : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer0 120 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer 0 121.


18 In Brief

Climate ControlsUse this system to control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. Power Button

10. Air Recirculation

11. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 198. For more informationabout the rear climate control, seeRear Climate Control System 0 201.

Transmission

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the L, indicating themaximum gear allowed for therange selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).

2. Press + (Plus) or − (Minus) onthe shift lever to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

See Manual Mode 0 231.


In Brief 19

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemThe base radio with infotainmentdisplay controls information isincluded in this manual. See theinfotainment manual for informationon the uplevel radios, audio players,phone, navigation system, RearSeat Entertainment (RSE), andvoice or speech recognition,if equipped.

Radio(s){ :

. Press to go to the Home Page.

O :

. Press to turn the power on.

. Press and hold to turn thepower off.

. Press to mute/unmute thesystem when on.

. Turn to decrease or increase thevolume.

7 :

. Radio: Press and release to fastseek the previous strongeststation or channel.

. USB/Music/Pictures: Press to goto the previous content. Pressand hold to fast rewind.

6 :

. Radio: Press and release to fastseek the next strongest stationor channel.

. USB/Music/Pictures: Press to goto the next content. Press andhold to fast forward.

v :

. Press and release to access thephone screen, answer anincoming call, or access thedevice home screen.

See Overview 0 175.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, a SiriusXM satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:

. www.siriusxm.com or call1-888-601-6296 (U.S.).

. www.siriusxm.ca or call1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio 0 179.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary input and may have twoUSB ports in the center stack.External devices such as iPods®,MP3 players, and USB storagedevices may be connected.

See Auxiliary Devices 0 187 andUSB Port 0 181.


20 In Brief

BluetoothThe Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) 0 189 or Bluetooth(Overview) 0 188.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

g : For vehicles with OnStar® or aBluetooth® system, press to interactwith those systems. See OnStarOverview 0 404 or “Bluetooth(Overview)” in the infotainmentmanual.

i : Press to reject an incomingcall or end a current call. Press tomute or unmute the infotainmentsystem when not on a call.

o or p : Press to go to theprevious or next menu option.

w orx : Press to go to the next orprevious selection.

V : Press to select a highlightedmenu option.

The favorite and volume switchesare on the back of the steeringwheel.

1. Favorite: When on a radiosource, press to select the nextor previous favorite. When on amedia source, press to selectthe next or previous track.


In Brief 21

2. Volume: Press to increase ordecrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls 0 119.

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system onand off. A white indicator appears inthe instrument cluster whenturned on.

RES+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If the cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 240 orAdaptive Cruise Control 0 243 (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base and Midlevel) 0 145 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Uplevel)0 148.


22 In Brief

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 257.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the samedirection that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake the

vehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 259.

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) SystemIf equipped, the FPB system mayhelp avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes withnearby pedestrians when driving ina forward gear. FPB displays anamber indicator, ~, when a nearbypedestrian is detected directlyahead. When approaching adetected pedestrian too quickly,FPB provides a red flashing alert onthe windshield and rapidly beeps orpulses the driver seat. FPB canprovide a boost to braking orautomatically brake the vehicle.

See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System 0 261.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)alert as the lane marking is crossed.The system will not assist or alert ifit detects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 265 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 266.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidly


In Brief 23

approaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside mirror and will flash if theturn signal is on. The Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 263 and Lane Change Alert (LCA)0 264.

Surround VisionIf equipped, views around thevehicle appear in the infotainmentdisplay to aid with parking andlow-speed maneuvers.

See “Surround Vision” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 253.

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area infront of the vehicle appears on theinfotainment display to aid withparking and low-speed maneuvers.

See “Front Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 253.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC shows a view ofthe area behind the vehicle on theinfotainment display when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) toaid with parking and low-speedbacking maneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 253.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA systemshows a triangle with an arrow onthe infotainment display to warn oftraffic behind your vehicle that maycross your vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Park AssistIf equipped, Rear Park Assist (RPA)uses sensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may show awarning triangle on the infotainmentdisplay and a graphic on theinstrument cluster to provide theobject distance. In addition, multiplebeeps or seat pulses may occur ifvery close to an object.

The vehicle may also have the FrontPark Assist system.


Power OutletsThe vehicle has two 12-voltaccessory power outlets, which canbe used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

The power outlets are located:

. On the center stack below theclimate controls.


24 In Brief. In the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, lift the cover.

See Power Outlets 0 124.

Universal Remote System

If equipped, the Universal RemoteSystem allows for garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices to beprogrammed to work with thesebuttons in the vehicle.

See Universal Remote System0 160.

SunroofIf equipped, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY,or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)must be active to operate thesunroof.See Ignition Positions 0 221 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 226.

1. Sunroof Switch (SLIDE)2. Vent Switch (TILT)

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close :Press and releaseD (1) toexpress-open the sunroof. Pressand releaseg (1) toexpress-close the sunroof.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : FullypressD (1) to open the sunroof.Release to stop at the desiredposition. Fully pressg (1) toclose the sunroof. Release to stopat the desired position.

Tilt Switch

Vent Feature : PressE (2) to ventthe sunroof. Press again and hold toopen the sunroof. Release to stop atthe desired position. Pressg (2)to express-close the sunroof. Pressagain to stop the movement.

See Sunroof 0 53.


In Brief 25

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe Traction Control System (TCS)limits wheel spin. The system is onwhen the vehicle is started.

The StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.

. To turn off TCS, press andrelease g. i illuminates in theinstrument cluster and the a DICmessage may display.

. Press and release g again toturn TCS back on.

. To turn off both TCS andStabiliTrak/ESC, press andhold g until g and i illuminatein the instrument cluster. A DICmessage may display.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 236.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See

Vehicle Load Limits 0 217. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 328.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure. See “Tire Fill Alert (IfEquipped)” under Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 329.


26 In Brief

Fuel

Regular Unleaded Fuel

Use only Regular 87 octane — (R+M)/2 — or higher unleadedgasoline in your vehicle. TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline isrecommended. Do not use gasolinewith an octane rating lower as it willresult in reduced performance andlower fuel economy. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 268.

E85 or FlexFuel

No E85 or FlexFuel

Gasoline-ethanol fuel blends greaterthan E15 (15% ethanol by volume),such as E85, cannot be used in thisvehicle.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC.See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base and Midlevel)0 145 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 148.

2. Press and hold V on the DICwhile the Oil Life display isactive. The oil life will changeto 100%.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 293.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after theengine is started, or turn themoff when not required.

. On AWD vehicles, see DriverMode Control 0 239.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.


In Brief 27. Combine several trips into a

single trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 394.


28 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 35Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 39Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 46Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 48

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 50Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 50Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 50Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle witha Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 29

The key, inside the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, is used forthe driver door.

To remove the key, press the buttonnear the bottom of the transmitter,and pull the key out. Never pull thekey out without pressing the button.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Contact Roadside Assistance iflocked out of the vehicle. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 394.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See OnStar Overview 0 404.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 400.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operatingrange:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “KeylessAccess Operation” following.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.



Other conditions can impact theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 29.

With Remote Start Shown, WithoutSimilar

Q : Press to lock all doors. The turnsignal indicators may flash and/orthe horn may sound on the secondpress to indicate locking. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed and Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout is enabled, all doorswill lock and then the driver door willimmediately unlock. See Vehicle

Personalization 0 152. If thepassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System 0 46.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock all doors. The RKEtransmitter can be programmed tounlock all doors on the first buttonpress. See Vehicle Personalization0 152. When remotely unlocking thevehicle at night the fog lamps andback-up lamps will come on forabout 30 seconds to light yourapproach to the vehicle. The turnsignal indicators may flash toindicate unlocking. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System 0 46.

If equipped, pressing and holding Kwill open the windows, if enabled.See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

/ : If equipped, press and releaseQ and then immediately press andhold/ for at least four seconds tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 35.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirpsthree times. Press and hold 7 forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signal lamps flash for30 seconds, or until 7 is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.

b : Press twice quickly to open orclose the liftgate.

Press once to stop the liftgate frommoving.

Keyless Access Operation

With the Keyless Access system,you can lock and unlock the doorsand access the liftgate withoutremoving the RKE transmitter fromyour pocket, purse, briefcase, etc.



The RKE transmitter should bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or doorbeing opened.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 61.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe driver door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors will unlock.

Driver Shown, Passenger Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has openedand all doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromPassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on that door handlewill unlock all doors. Pressing thelock/unlock button will cause alldoors to lock if any of the followingoccur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has openedand all doors are now closed.

Passive Locking

The vehicle will lock severalseconds after all doors are closed ifthe vehicle is off and at least oneRKE transmitter has been removedor none remain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKE



transmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 152.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking

Temporarily disable passive lockingby pressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or untilthree chimes are heard. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil Q on the interior door ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off andan RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle, the horn will chirp threetimes after all doors are closed. Toturn on or off, see VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay NO REMOTE DETECTEDand the horn will chirp three times.This occurs only once each time thevehicle is driven.

To turn on or off, see VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the liftgatehandle to open the liftgate if theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft).

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 37.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a

replacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with RecognizedTransmitters

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere are two recognizedtransmitters.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder.

2. Remove the key lock cylindercap on the driver door handle.See Door Locks 0 37. Insertthe vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle and turn the key,



counterclockwise, to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.

3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage areabetween the driver and frontpassenger seats.

4. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC will displaythat it is ready to program thenext transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress the transmitter K or Qbutton.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP for12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

6. Put the key back into thetransmitter.

7. Replace the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks 0 37.

Programming without RecognizedTransmitters

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up toeight transmitters. This feature isnot available in Canada. Thisprocedure will take approximately30 minutes to complete. The vehiclemust be off and all of thetransmitters you wish to programmust be with you.

1. Remove the key lock cylindercap on the driver door handle.See Door Locks 0 37. Insertthe vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle and turn the key,counterclockwise, to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC will again displayREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.



The DIC should now displayREADY FOR REMOTE # 1.

4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage areabetween the driver and frontpassenger seats.

5. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC will displaythat it is ready to program thenext transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress the transmitter K or Qbutton.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP for12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

7. Put the key back into thetransmitter.

8. Replace the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks 0 37.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

When the vehicle is started, if thetransmitter battery is weak, the DICmay display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE. The DICmay also display REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center consolestorage area by opening thearmrest.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and ENGINESTART/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a flat, thin object in thecenter of the transmitter toseparate and remove the backcover.

2. Lift the battery with a flatobject.

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside toward the back cover.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, this feature allows theengine to be started from outside ofthe vehicle.

/ : This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during a remote startbased on cold ambient conditions.The rear fog indicator light does notcome on during a remote start.

If the vehicle has heated orventilated seats, they may come onduring a remote start. See Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats 0 64.

If equipped with a remote startheated steering wheel, the heatedwheel will turn on automatically inremote start along with the heatedseats when it is cold outside. SeeHeated Steering Wheel 0 120.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some laws



may require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 29.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash. Theturn signal lamps flashingconfirms the request to remotestart the vehicle has beenreceived.

During the remote start thedoors will be locked and theparking lamps will remain on aslong as the engine is running.

The engine will shut off after15 minutes unless a timeextension is done or thevehicle is started.

3. With the RKE transmitter in thevehicle, press the brake pedaland start the vehicle to drive.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can also beextended by another 15 minutes,if during the first 15 minutesSteps 1 and 2 are repeated whilethe engine is still running. Anextension can be requested30 seconds after starting. Thisprovides a total of 30 minutes.

The remote start can only beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 15-minute period isadded on to the first 15 minutes fora total of 30 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a remote start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle must be started andthen turned off before the remotestart procedure can be used again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold / until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate ifany of the following occur:

. A transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts or astart with an extension havealready been used.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 37. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The doorscan be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance ofbeing thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock the door from theoutside:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29.

. Use the key in the driver door.The key lock cylinder is coveredwith a cap.

To lock or unlock the door from theinside:

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

. Push down on the door lockknob to lock a door.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock the door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

Keyless Access

If equipped, the RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft) of theliftgate or door being opened. Pressthe button on the door handle to



open. See “Keyless AccessOperation” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Driver Door Key Lock CylinderAccess (In Case of DeadBattery)

To access the driver door key lockcylinder:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil cap removal is complete.

2. Insert the key into the slot (3)on the bottom of the cap (2)and lift the key upward.

3. Move the cap (2) rearward andremove.

4. Use the key in the cylinder.

To replace the cap:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil cap installation iscomplete.

2. Insert the two tabs (6) at theback of the cap between theseal (5) and the metal base (4).

3. Slide the cap forward andpress the forward edge toinstall the cap in place.

4. Release the door handle.



5. Check that the cap is secure.

Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turnsfreely when either the wrong key isused, or the correct key is not fullyinserted. The free-turning door lockfeature prevents the lock from beingforced open. To reset the lock, turnit to the vertical position with thecorrect key fully inserted. Removethe key and insert it again. If thisdoes not reset the lock, turn the keyhalfway around in the cylinder andrepeat the reset procedure.

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors. Theindicator light in the switch will comeon when the door is locked.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking ofthe doors until five seconds after alldoors are closed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout has been turned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch while the door isopen, a chime will sound threetimes indicating delayed locking isactive.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors areclosed. If a door is reopened beforethat time, the five-second timer willreset when all doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again or press Q on the RKEtransmitter to lock the doorsimmediately.

This feature can also beprogrammed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park), the doorswill lock.



If a vehicle door is unlocked andthen opened and closed, the doorswill lock either when your foot isremoved from the brake or thevehicle speed becomes faster than13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on a door.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Lockout ProtectionIf the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY and the power doorlock switch is pressed with thedriver door open, all the doors willlock and only the driver door willunlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKE

transmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will chirp threetimes.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout hasbeen turned on and the vehicle isoff, the driver door is open, andlocking is requested, all the doorswill lock and the driver door willremain open. Press the button againto lock the driver door. TheUnlocked Door Anti-Lockout featurecan be turned on or off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Manual Safety Locks

If equipped, the safety lock is on theinside edge of the rear doors. Touse the safety lock:

1. Move the lever down to thelock position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.



To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by activatingthe inside handle, by pressingthe power door lock switch,or by using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

2. Open the door from theoutside.

When the safety lock is enabled,adults and older children will not beable to open the rear door from theinside. Cancel the safety locks toenable the doors to open from theinside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open itfrom the outside.

2. Move the lever up to unlock.Do the same for the other door.

Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 228.

Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Manual Liftgate

To unlock the liftgate, press K onthe power door lock switch orpress K on the RKE transmitter



twice within five seconds. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the bottom of the liftgatehandle and lift up.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the liftgate can be opened whenlocked if the RKE transmitter is

within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Driving with an open andunsecured liftgate may result indamage to the power liftgatecomponents.

If equipped, the power liftgateswitch is on the driver door. Thevehicle must be in P (Park). Thetaillamps flash when the powerliftgate moves.

The modes are:

. MAX: Opens to maximumheight.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 43. 3/4: Opens to a reduced height

that can be set from 3/4 to fullyopen. Use to prevent the liftgatefrom opening into overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor or roof-mounted cargo. Theliftgate can be manually openedall the way.

. OFF: Opens manually only.

To power open or close the liftgate,select MAX or 3/4 mode.

. Pressb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the driver door.The driver door must either beunlocked or locked without thesecurity armed.

. Press the touch pad on thebottom of the liftgate afterunlocking all doors. If equippedwith Keyless Access, a lockedvehicle can be opened if theRKE transmitter is within 1 m(3 ft) of the touch pad.

Pressl on the bottom of theliftgate next to the pull cup to close.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving to stop it.Pressing any liftgate button orpressingb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter again restarts theoperation in the reverse direction.Pressing the touch pad on theliftgate handle will restart themotion, but only in the openingdirection.

Caution

Manually forcing the liftgate toopen or close during a powercycle can damage the vehicle.Allow the power cycle tocomplete.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremelow temperatures, or after repeatedpower cycling over a short period oftime. If this occurs, the liftgate canstill be operated manually.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate will continueto completion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Check forDriver Information Center (DIC)messages and make sure theliftgate is closed and latched beforedriving.



Falling Liftgate Detection

If the power liftgate automaticallycloses after a power opening cycle,it indicates that the system isreacting to excess weight on theliftgate or a possible support strutfailure. A repetitive chime will soundwhile the falling liftgate detectionfeature is operating. Remove anyexcess weight. If the liftgatecontinues to automatically closeafter opening, see your dealer forservice before using the powerliftgate.

Interfering with the power liftgatemotion or manually closing theliftgate too quickly after poweropening may resemble a supportstrut failure. This could also activatethe falling liftgate detection feature.Allow the liftgate to complete itsoperation and wait a few secondsbefore manually closing the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,the liftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distance

away from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the liftgate which willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacle isencountered that prevents theliftgate from completely closing, thehorn will sound as an alert that theliftgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the sideedges of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate and thevehicle and presses against asensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andpower open the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl next to thepull cup on the outside of theliftgate until the turn signalsflash and a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate. See “Manual Liftgate” at thebeginning of this section.



Caution

Attempting to move the liftgatetoo quickly and with excessiveforce may result in damage to thevehicle.

Operate the liftgate manually with asmooth motion and moderatespeed. The system includes afeature which limits the manualclosing speed to protect thecomponents.

Hands-Free Operation

If equipped, the liftgate may beoperated with a kicking motionunder the left corner of the rearbumper.

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the rear bumper tooperate the power liftgatehands-free.

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use oneof the liftgate buttons.

The hands-free feature can becustomized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152. Choose fromthe following:

On-Open and Close : The kickingmotion is activated to both open andclose the liftgate.

On-Open Only : The kicking motionis activated to only open the liftgate.

Off : The feature is disabled.

Length of Kick Zone



To operate, kick your foot straight upin one swift motion under the leftcorner of the rear bumper, then pullit back.

Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn theliftgate mode to OFF whencleaning or working near the rearbumper to avoid accidentalopening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the liftgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close theliftgate by another method orstart the vehicle. The feature willbe re-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound. Step away from theliftgate before it starts moving.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.



On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the liftgateis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Close the liftgate and the hood.Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press theinside Q.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash indicating thealarm system is operating.Pressing Q on the RKEtransmitter a second time will

bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsand the lights flash three times, thealarm was activated while the alarmsystem was armed.



If the alarm system has beenactivated, a message will appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 400.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition is on orin ACC/ACCESSORY and a validtransmitter is present in the vehicle.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedRKE transmitter will start thevehicle. If the transmitter is everdamaged, you may not be able tostart your vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light may come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off),and the RKE transmitter appears tobe undamaged, try anothertransmitter. Or, you may try placingthe transmitter in the transmitterpocket located in the centerconsole.

If the ignition mode will not changewith the other transmitter or in thetransmitter pocket, your vehicleneeds service. If the ignition doeschange modes, the first transmittermay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new RKEtransmitter programmed to thevehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementRKE transmitters. Up to eighttransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see “ProgrammingTransmitters to the Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust a mirror:

1. Press} or| to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through an

automatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Memory Mirrors

The vehicle may have memorymirrors. See Memory Seats 0 61.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)

The vehicle may have LCA. SeeLane Change Alert (LCA) 0 264.

Side Blind Zone Alert

The vehicle may have Side BlindZone Alert. See Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) 0 263.

Heated MirrorsK : Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 198.



Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout switch to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 28.

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 226.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

This feature stops the rearpassenger windows from working.

Press2 to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on when engaged.

Press2 again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Pressthe switch down fully and quicklyrelease to express open thewindow.



If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release toexpress close the window.

Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature willreverse window movement if itcomes in contact with an object.Extreme cold or ice could cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow will operate normally afterthe object or condition is removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged.Before using automatic reversal

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary ifthe vehicle battery has beendisconnected or discharged. If thewindow is unable to express-up,program each express-closewindow:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window hasfully closed.

4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature allows allwindows to be opened remotely.If enabled in vehicle personalization,press and hold K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toopen all windows. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow and, if equipped, extendalong the rod.



Roof

SunroofIf equipped, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY,or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)must be active to operate thesunroof.See Ignition Positions 0 221 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)0 226.

1. Sunroof Switch (SLIDE)2. Vent Switch (TILT)

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close :Press and releaseD (1) toexpress-open the sunroof. Thesunshade will not openautomatically. Press and releaseg (1) to express-close thesunroof.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : FullypressD (1) to open the sunroof.The sunshade will not automaticallyopen with the sunroof. Release tostop at the desired position. Fullypressg (1) to close the sunroof.Release to stop at the desiredposition.

Tilt Switch

Vent Feature : PressE (2) to ventthe sunroof. Press again and hold toopen the sunroof. Release to stop atthe desired position. The sunshadewill not open automatically. Pressg (2) to express-close thesunroof. Press again to stop themovement.

The front sunshade can only beopened and closed manually. Thesunshade can be opened bypushing up on the handle, andclosed by pulling forward on thehandle until it latches.

If equipped, the rear sunshade canonly be opened or closed manually.To open, press the latch button (ifequipped) on the handle whilepushing up to unlatch it. Thesunshade will retract to the openposition. To close the sunshade, pullthe handle forward until it latches.Do not try to close the sunshadewhile the sunroof is fully opened orin the vent position.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automaticreversal system that is only activewhen the sunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.



If an object is in the path whileexpress closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof again.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature byclosing the sunroof in manual mode.To stop movement, release theswitch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


Seats and Restraints 55

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 59Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 59Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Heated and Ventilated Front

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71How to Wear Seat Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Seat Belt Use During

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 77

Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Replacing Seat Belt System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 80When Should an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83How Does an Airbag

Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Passenger Sensing System . . . 85Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 90Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 91Replacing Airbag System Parts

after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Infants and Young Children . . . . 93Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 96Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 97Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) . . . . 99

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 105

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108


56 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button located on the sideof the head restraint, and pull up orpush the head restraint down, andrelease the button. Pull and push onthe head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Rear Seats

Second Row Seats

The vehicle’s rear second row seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.



The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The second row head restraints arenot removable.

Folding the Second Row HeadRestraint

The head restraint can be foldedrearward to allow for better visibilitywhen the rear seat is unoccupied.

To fold the head restraint, press thebutton on the side of the headrestraint.

The head restraint will fold rearwardautomatically.

When an occupant or child restraintis in the seat, always return thehead restraint to the full uprightposition. Pull head restraint up andforward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the head restraintto make sure that it is locked.

Always adjust the head restraint sothat the top of the restraint is at thesame height as the top of theoccupant's head.



Third Row Seats

The vehicle’s rear third row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted up or down.

The rear third row outboard headrestraints are not removable.

The rear third row outboard headrestraints are designed to be folded.

The head restraint can be folded toallow for better visibility when therear seat is unoccupied.

When folding the seatback down,the head restraint will automaticallyfold out of the way as the seat isfolded down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle under the seatto unlock it.

2. Move the seat forward orrearward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

If equipped, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.



Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

The power seats will work withthe ignition off. Children couldoperate the power seats and beinjured. Never leave childrenalone in the vehicle.

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 59.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 59.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibration inthe driver seat to help the driveravoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 251.

Lumbar Adjustment

Press and hold the control forwardto increase or rearward to decreasesupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the seat belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear theseat belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.




Power Reclining Seatbacks

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

Memory Seats

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall theirunique seat positions for driving thevehicle, and a shared exit positionfor getting out of the vehicle. Otherfeature positions may also besaved, such as power mirrors andpower steering wheel, if equipped.Memory positions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press andrelease SET; a beep will sound.

Then immediately press and hold 1,2, orB (Exit) until two beepssound. To manually recall thesepositions, press and hold 1, 2, orBuntil the saved position is reached.Follow the instructions under“Saving Memory Positions.”

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number (1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29. OnlyRKE transmitters 1 and 2 can beused for automatic memory recalls.A Driver Information Center (DIC)welcome message indicating thetransmitter number may display forthe first few ignition cycles followinga transmitter change. For AutoMemory Recall to work properly,save the positions to the memorybutton (1 or 2) matching the RKEtransmitter number displayed in theDIC welcome message. Carry thelinked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.



Memory adjustments may not beavailable upon delivery or afterservice until steps in “SavingMemory Positions” section areperformed.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Auto Memory Recallmovement begin when thevehicle is started, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Comfort and Convenience,and then Auto Memory Recall.Select On or Off. See “AutoMemory Recall” later in thissection.

. To begin Easy Exit Recallmovement when the ignition isturned off and the driver door isopened, or when the ignition isturned off with the driver dooralready opened, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Comfort and Convenience,and then Easy Exit Options.Select On or Off. See “Easy ExitRecall” later in this section.

. See Vehicle Personalization0 152 for additional settinginformation.

Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Start the vehicle with a differentkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the drivernumber; 1 or 2. Turn theignition off and remove the keyor RKE transmitter from thevehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the otherdriver number not shown inStep 1.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:


A DIC welcome message mayindicate driver number 1 or 2.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcomemessage until two beepssound.

If too much time passesbetween releasing SET andpressing 1, the memoryposition will not be saved andtwo beeps will not sound.Repeat Steps 3 and 4.

1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” previously in thissection.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2.

To save the position forB andeasy exit features, repeat Steps 1–4usingB. This saves the positionfor getting out of the vehicle.



Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously saved memorypositions.

To stop Manual Memory Recallmovement, release 1, 2, orB orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel,if equipped

Auto Memory Recall

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29. If theRKE transmitter is 1 or 2, and AutoMemory Recall is programmed on invehicle personalization, the

positions saved to the samememory button number 1 or 2 areautomatically recalled when theignition is turned on, or turned fromoff to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKEtransmitters 3–8 will not provideautomatic memory recalls.

To turn Auto Memory Recall on oroff, see "Vehicle PersonalizationSettings" previously in this sectionand Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)to start Auto Memory Recall. AutoMemory Recall will complete if thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park)prior to reaching the saved memoryposition.

To stop Auto Memory Recallmovement, turn the ignition off orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB



If the saved memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall orrecalls to the wrong positions, thedriver’s RKE transmitter number (1or 2) may not match the memorybutton number that positions weresaved to. Try saving the position tothe other memory button or try theother RKE transmitter.

Easy Exit Recall

Easy Exit Recall is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position savedtoB is used for all drivers. To turnEasy Exit Recall on or off, see"Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section andVehicle Personalization 0 152.

If turned on, the position saved toB is automatically recalled whenone of the following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.



To stop Easy Exit Recall movement,press any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB



Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power steering wheelwhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer for service.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, use carewhen using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+, if available, to heatthe driver or passengerseatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger cushion and seatback.



Press C or {, if available, toventilate the driver or passengerseat. A ventilated seat has a fanthat pulls or pushes air through theseat. The air is not cooled.

When a heated seat is turned on,the indicator on button turns red.When a ventilated seat is turned on,the indicator on button turns blue.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the front heated seats areon high, the level may automaticallybe lowered after approximately30 minutes.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats

If the vehicle is equipped with autoheated or ventilated seats, and theignition is on, this feature will

automatically activate the heated orventilated seats at the level requiredby the vehicle's interior temperature.

The active high, medium, low, or offheated or ventilated seat level willbe indicated by the manual heatedand ventilated seat buttons on thecenter stack. Use the manualheated and ventilated seat buttonson the center stack to turn autoheated or ventilated seats off. If thepassenger seat is unoccupied, theauto heated or ventilated seatsfeature will not activate that seat.The auto heated and ventilatedseats feature can be programmed toalways be enabled when the vehicleis on. If equipped with a heatedsteering wheel, the auto heatedsteering wheel activation will followthe heated seat auto activation andthe heated wheel indicator willfollow the state of the steeringwheel heat.

See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats, if equipped, can beturned on automatically. When it iscold outside, the heated seats willturn on followed by the heatedsteering wheel, if equipped. When itis hot outside, the ventilated seatsturn on. The heated or ventilatedseats are canceled when theignition is turned on. Press theheated or ventilated seat button touse the heated or ventilated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The remote start heated orventilated seats may be enabled ordisabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 35 andVehicle Personalization 0 152.



Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REARSEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REARSEAT displays under certainconditions indicating there may bean item or passenger in the rearseat. Check before exiting thevehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened whilethe vehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on.There will be an alert when thevehicle is turned off. The alert doesnot directly detect objects in the rearseat; instead, under certainconditions, it detects when a reardoor is opened and closed,indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rearseat; for example, if a child entered

the vehicle through the rear doorand left the vehicle without thevehicle being shut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

Rear Seat Adjustment

The second row seats slide forwardfor more room.

To adjust the seat position:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks onthe floor.

2. Lift the lever below the seatcushion and slide the seatforward or backward.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto ensure the seat is locked inplace.

Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.



{ Warning

If the seatback and floor latchesare not locked, the seat couldmove forward in a sudden stop orcrash and injure the occupant.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure theseatback and floor latches arelocked.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To access the third row from thedriver side:


2. Make sure that the seat belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

3. Pull the handle on top of theseat forward and pull the seatforward.

To access the third row from thepassenger side:

Remove objects on the floor in frontof the second row seat, or in theseat tracks on the floor.

The second row passenger sideseat can be easily moved for thirdrow entry or exit with aforward-facing child restraintinstalled using the LATCH system.Remove a rear-facing child restraintbefore moving the seat for third rowentry or exit.

{ Warning

Remove the child from the childrestraint before moving the seatforward for third row entry or exit.Failure to do so may result ininjury to the child.

Pull the handle on top of the seatforward and pull the seat forward.



Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seat orin the seat tracks on the floor.

2. Push on the seatback until theseat is locked into place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

4. Check that the seat belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatbacks:

1. Leaning rearward in the seat,pull the reclining seatbackhandle.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the handle to lock theseatback in place.


Folding the Seatbacks

To fold the second row seatbacks:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Fold the head restraintrearward. See Head Restraints0 56.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback handle.

To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the seatbackand push it rearward until it locksinto place. Push and pull on the



seatback to make sure it is locked.Push on the head restraint to returnit to the upright, locked position.

The second row seatbacks can alsobe folded forward by pulling thelevers on the driver side of the rearcargo area. The top lever folds thedriver side seatback and the bottomlever folds the passenger sideseatback.

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. See theWarning under Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 64.

If equipped, the buttons are on therear of the center console.

With the ignition on, press M or Lto heat the left or right outboard seatcushion. On vehicles without rear

climate controls, an indicator lighton the button will turn on when theheated seat is on. On vehicles withrear climate controls, an indicator onthe climate control display appearswhen this feature is on.

On vehicles without rear climatecontrols but equipped with heatedrear seats, press the button again toturn this feature off. The light on thebutton will turn off. On vehicles withrear climate controls, this featureturns on at the highest setting. Witheach press of the button, the heatedseat changes to the next lowersetting, and then the off setting.Three lights indicate the highestsetting, and one light indicates thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh, the level may automatically belowered after approximately30 minutes.



Third Row Seats

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or pushed forward in theentry position, could cause injuryin a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

Folding the Seatback

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To fold the third row seatback:


2. If the second row seat is in thefull rear position, adjust itforward to allow the third rowseat to fold fully flat.

3. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

4. Pull the strap on the seatback.

5. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

6. Repeat for the other seatback,if necessary.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. From the rear of the vehicle,raise the seatback to theupright position using the strapon the back of the third rowseat, or lift the seatback andpush it into place from insidethe vehicle.

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

2. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked inplace.



{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to useseat belts properly, and some thingsnot to do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where aseat belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingseat belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingseat belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts.See Seat Belt Reminders 0 134.

Why Seat Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the seatbelts. That is why wearing seat beltsmakes such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seatbelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only. They work withseat belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children 0 91 orInfants and Young Children 0 93.Review and follow the rules forchildren in addition to the followingrules.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing seat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou (if possible).

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,



this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour seat belt properly.

Never allow the lap or shoulder beltto become loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.



Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See PassengerSensing System 0 85.



If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 77.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Always stow the seat belt slowly.If the seat belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull theseat belt straight out firmly to unlockthe webbing, and then release it.If the webbing is still locked in theretractor, see your dealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a seat belt,damage can occur to both the seatbelt and the vehicle.



Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the seat belt assembly.They can help tighten the seat beltsduring the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Seat beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe seat belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle’s seat beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 78.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicleor at any time while sitting in theseat. Sitting on the seat belt candamage the webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt,the comfort guide positions theshoulder belt away from the neckand head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle may have comfortguides for the second row outboardseating positions available in theglove box or cargo area, or they areavailable through your dealer.Instructions are included with theguides.

Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for the third rowseating positions. Instructions areincluded with the guide.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear seat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a seatbelt is worn properly, it is more likely



that the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making seatbelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you anextender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personalinjury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it forsecuring child restraints. For moreinformation on the proper use and fitof seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), andseat belt anchorages to make surethey are all in working order. Lookfor any other loose or damaged seatbelt system parts that might keep aseat belt system from performingproperly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn, frayed, or twistedseat belts may not protect you in acrash. Torn or frayed seat belts canrip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, have itreplaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible tountwist by reversing the latch plateon the webbing. If the twist cannotbe corrected, ask your dealer tofix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminderlight is working. See Seat BeltReminders 0 134.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 77.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfacesand seat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dustor debris in the mechanism. If dustor debris exists in the system pleasesee the dealer. Parts may need tobe replaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.



Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the seat belt systems areworking properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary.But the seat belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the seatbelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 135.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A knee airbag for the driver

. A front center airbag for thedriver and front outboardpassenger

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger



All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side ofthe driver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seat closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seatbelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are notdesigned to inflate in every crash.In some crashes seat belts arethe only restraint. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 82.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe seat belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a seat beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Seat belts help keep youin position before and during acrash. Always wear a seat belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicleswith a front center airbag.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 91 orInfants and Young Children 0 93.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 135.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column.

The front center airbag is in theinboard side of the driver seatback.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sidesof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mountedside impact airbag or the frontcenter airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 78.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal impacts. Knee airbagsare not designed to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,or in many side impacts.

The front center airbag is designedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending upon the



location of the impact, when eitherside of the vehicle is struck. Inaddition, the front center airbag isdesigned to inflate when thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate in

rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 80.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.



But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 82.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto seat belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After frontal, knee, andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize the airbags inflated.The front center airbag and roof-railairbags may still be at least partiallyinflated for some time after theyinflate. Some components of theairbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 80.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming

from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazard

warning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. After turning the ignitionoff and then on again, the fuelsystem will return to normaloperation; the doors can be locked,the interior lamps can be turned off,and the hazard warning flashers canbe turned off using the controls forthose features. If any of thesesystems are damaged in the crashthey may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

concealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 402 and Event DataRecorders 0 402.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.


Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 135.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.



The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand seat belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontal

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

secure child restraints in the rearseat. Consider using anothervehicle to transport the childwhen a rear seat is not available.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the OFF indicator will light and staylit as a reminder that the airbag isoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 135.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the ON indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a seat belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for thatperson.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 135 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 108 or Securing ChildRestraints (With the Seat Beltin the Rear Seat) 0 106.

Make sure the seat beltretractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor wheninstalling the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a seat belt lockoff. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightenedbut not pulled out of theretractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the ON indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicle



seatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 56.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rearseat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even if theON indicator is not lit.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the OFF indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way,the child restraint lockingfeature will be engaged. Thismay unintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way,and then buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the ON indicator is lit.



{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag OFF indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat duringvehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensingsystem maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Seat Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 90for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The ON indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 399.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

are close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:

. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, airbag wiring, or frontcenter console

. Front seats, including stitching,seams or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrumentpanel, overhead console, ceilingtrim, or pillar garnish trim

. Inner door seals, includingspeakers

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag modules and sensors,sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger's seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on top

of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 85.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 337 for additionalimportant information.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 392.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 135.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 80. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot properly protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 135.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s seat belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 74.If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 74.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use seat beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same seat belt. Theseat belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear theseat belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes the

need, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the seatbelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle’s seat belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injured

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontpassenger seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If a forward-facing childrestraint must be secured in thefront passenger seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

If a child restraint is installed inthe second row center seat, movethe second row seat to therearward position, wheneverpossible, to minimize contact withthe front center airbag.



Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimescalled child seats or car seats.

There are three basic types ofchild restraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rear-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label saying thatit meets federal motor vehicle safetystandards. The restraintmanufacturer's instructions thatcome with the restraint state theweight and height limitations for aparticular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with specialneeds.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat isused for children who haveoutgrown their forward-facing childrestraint. Boosters are designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle's seatbelt system until the child is largeenough for the vehicle seat belts tofit properly without a booster seat.See the seat belt fit test in OlderChildren 0 91.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraints mustbe secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 99 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPST

availability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.



The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 85 for additional information.

If a child restraint is installed in asecond row center seat, move thesecond row seat to the rearwardposition, whenever possible, tominimize contact with the frontcenter airbag.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent seat belts orLATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.Adjacent seating positions shouldnot be used if the child restraintprevents access to or interferes withthe routing of the seat belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to



properly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s seat belts. Do not useboth the seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or the seatbelts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 108 or Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the RearSeat) 0 106.

Child restraints built after March2014 will be labeled with thespecific child weight up to which theLATCH system can be used toinstall the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positionshave lower anchors. In this case,the seat belt must be used (with toptether where available) to securethe child restraint.See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 108 or Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the RearSeat) 0 106.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a single attachmenthook (2) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — Bucket

I : Seating positions with toptether anchors.



H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.

Second Row — 60/40 Bench


H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.

Third Row


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each second row anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the anchor.

Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar

The top tether anchors are at thebottom rear of the seatback for eachseating position in the second row.



Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Third Row

The top tether anchors are on therear of the seatback for eachseating position in the third row.

Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 97 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attachedto the vehicle using either theLATCH anchors or the vehicleseat belt. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s seat belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled seat belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the rear seatbackwhen the seat is occupied. Do notfold the empty rear seat with aseat belt buckled. This coulddamage the seat belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the seat beltto its stowed position, beforefolding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position. If a child restraint isinstalled in a second row centerseat, move the second row seat tothe rearward position, wheneverpossible, to minimize contact withthe front center airbag.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 97.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraint

does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe seat belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. To access the loweranchors in the secondrow, it may help to reclinethe seatback.

Third row seatbacks mustbe upright before placingthe child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.



If necessary, adjust theangle of the second rowseatback to achieve atight installation. Makesure the second rowbench seatbacks arealigned at the sameangle.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if the vehicle has one. Refer tothe child restraint instructionsand the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tetheranchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraint

and you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, raise the headrestor head restraint androute the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand around the headrestor head restraint posts.



If the position being usedhas an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand a single tether isbeing used, route thetether between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest or head restraint

and you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether under the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attempt

to move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.



New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position. If you install a childrestraint in a second row centerseat, move the second row seat tothe rearward position, wheneverpossible, to minimize contact withthe front center airbag.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 99 for how and where to

install the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using a seatbelt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 99 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seatbelt to secure the child restraint.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 97.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's seat beltthrough or around the childrestraint. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 99.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 97.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System0 85 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 135 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 85 for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 99 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the childrestraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the OFF indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 135.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's seat beltthrough or around the childrestraint. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.


Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbag is off, the OFF indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 85.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 111

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 111Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 111Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Center Console Storage . . . . . . 112

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Cargo Management

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access.


112 Storage

Armrest Storage

If equipped, the rear seat armrestmay have cupholders. Pull thearmrest down to access thecupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess the removable cargomanagement system.

Center Console Storage

The center console has storageunder the armrest. Pull up the latchand lift to open.

The center console also has thefollowing:

. A forward bin

. An open or covered storage binon the back of the console


Storage 113

The back center console has astorage bin. Pull the handle down toaccess.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover

{ Warning

An unsecured cargo cover couldstrike people in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash. Store thecargo cover securely or remove itfrom the vehicle.

For vehicles with a cargo cover, itcan be used to cover items in therear of the vehicle. Unroll the covertoward the rear of the vehicle. Insertthe cover pins into the channels onboth sides. To store, carefullyremove the cover from the channelsand let it roll back up. The covershould be stored securely when notin use.

Cargo Tie-Downs

Two cargo tie-downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.


114 Storage

Cargo ManagementSystem

Tray Option

Lift the load floor to access thecargo management system.

The cargo management system isused to organize storage in thecargo area.

Cargo Management SystemTray Removal

To access the spare tire or the tiresealant and compressor kit, thecargo management system traymust be removed.

1. Turn the right side wing nut toremove.

2. Remove the strap.

Make sure the strap is secureafter service or reinstalling thecargo management system.


Storage 115

3. Turn the left side wing nut toremove.

4. Remove the small storage bin.

5. Unsnap the hinges on the loadfloor from the cargomanagement system.

6. Pull up to remove the loadfloor.

7. Lift up on both sides to removethe cargo management systemto access the spare tire.

All Terrain

The rear trays do not need to beremoved to access the spare tire.


116 Storage

Rail and Divider Option

Cargo Management SystemUnlock

Cargo Management SystemInstallation

1. Turn both knobs to the unlockposition.

2. Slide the divider along the railto the desired position until itclicks into place.

3. Make sure the divider is lockedinto place in the rail grooves.

Cargo Management System Lock

4. Turn both knobs to the lockposition.

Cargo Management SystemRemoval

1. Turn both knobs to the unlockposition.

2. Press the buttons and pull upto remove the divider.

3. Store the divider outside of thevehicle.


Storage 117

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack — like paneling,plywood, or a mattress — thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can beused to load items. For roof racksthat do not have crossrails included,GM certified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer.

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 100 kg(220 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails, making sure to fastencargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roof

rack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits 0 217.


118 Instruments and Controls

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 119Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 119Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 120Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 120Rear Window Wiper/

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 134

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 135Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Charging System Light . . . . . . . 136Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 136Brake System Warning

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Electric Parking Brake

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Service Electric Parking Brake

Light (Uplevel and MidlevelCluster Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 140Hill Descent Control Light . . . . 140Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 140Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . 141Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 141Traction Control System (TCS)/

StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 142Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 142Low Fuel Warning Light (Base

Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Low Fuel Warning Light(Midlevel and Uplevel) . . . . . . 143

Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 144Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 144Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 144Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 144Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Information DisplaysDriver Information Center (DIC)

(Base and Midlevel) . . . . . . . . . 145Driver Information Center (DIC)

(Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Engine Power Messages . . . . . 151Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 151

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 152

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 160Universal Remote System

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Universal Remote System

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


Instruments and Controls 119

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thewheel in place.


Power Tilt and TelescopingSteering Wheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel,if equipped:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.



If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

g : For vehicles with OnStar or aBluetooth system, press to interactwith those systems. See OnStarOverview 0 404 or “Bluetooth(Overview)” in the infotainmentmanual.

i : Press to reject an incomingcall or end a current call. Press tomute or unmute the infotainmentsystem when not on a call.



o or p : Press to go to theprevious or next menu option.

w orx : Press to go to the next orprevious selection.

V : Press to select a highlightedmenu option.

The favorite and volume switchesare on the back of the steeringwheel.

1. Favorite: When on a radiosource, press to select the nextor previous favorite. When on amedia source, press to selectthe next or previous track.

2. Volume: Press to increase ordecrease the volume.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped, press to turn it on oroff. An indicator light next to thebutton displays when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

If equipped with a remote startheated steering wheel, the heatedsteering wheel will turn onautomatically in remote start alongwith the heated seats when it is cold

outside. The heated steering wheelindicator light may not come on.See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 64.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the windshieldwiper lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.



INT : Move the windshield wiperlever to INT. Turn the band up formore frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

f : Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate thewindshield wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached. When the windshield wiperlever is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how longthe windshield washer had been

activated. See Washer Fluid 0 301for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 306.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. See Electrical SystemOverload 0 310.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are on LO, HI, or INT, theywill immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear window wiper/washercontrols are on the end of thewindshield wiper lever.

Turn the controls to adjust thesetting.



OFF : Turns the wiper off.

INT : Turns on the rear wiper with adelay between wipes.

ON : Turns on the rear wiper.

1 : Push the windshield wiperlever forward to spray washer fluidon the rear window. The wipers willclear the rear window and eitherstop or return to your preset speed.For more washer cycles, press andhold the lever.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate is open orajar. If the liftgate is opened whilethe rear wiper is on, the wiperreturns to the parked position andstops.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFFto disable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the vehicle is inR (Reverse) and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the vehicle is inR (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 301.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC),and vehicle speed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again.



Clock

Base Radio

The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation 0 176 onhow to use the menu system.

Setting the Time and Date

When Auto Set is enabled the timecannot be manually set.

1. Press {, then touchSETTINGS.

2. Touch Time and Date, then SetTime or Set Date.

3. Touch + or − to adjust thevalue.

4. Touch R or Q to adjust AM orPM for 12 hour format.

5. Touch0.

Using Auto Set


2. Touch Time and Date, thenAuto Set.

3. Select from the availableselections.

4. Touch0.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Touch Time and Date, thenselect 12h or 24h format.

3. Touch0.

Setting the Month and DayFormat


2. Touch Time and Date, then SetDate Format.

3. Select DD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year), MM/DD/YYYY(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day)format.

4. Touch0.

Uplevel Radio Using CenterStack Controls

The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See “Using the System”under “Introduction” in theinfotainment manual.

To set the time or date:

1. Press {, then selectSETTINGS.

2. Select Time and Date, then thedesired function.

3. Turn the MENU knob toincrease or decrease the value.

4. Press the MENU knob to go tothe next value. After the lastvalue is selected, the systemwill update and return to theSettings menu. Press o BACKto go to the last menu andsave the changes.

Auto Set requires an active OnStaror connected service plan.



If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the clock display:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select Clock Display.

3. Turn the MENU knob to Offor On.

4. Press the MENU knob toselect.

Press o BACK to go to the lastmenu and save the changes.

Uplevel Radio UsingInfotainment Display Controls

To set the time:

1. Touch SETTINGS from theHome Page, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time and touch«orª to increase or decreasehours, minutes, and AM or PM.Touch 12–24 Hr for 12 or24 hour clock.

3. Touch } to go back to theprevious menu.

Auto Set requires an active OnStaror connected service plan.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:

1. Touch SETTINGS from theHome Page, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Date and touch«orª to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


To set the clock display:

1. Touch SETTINGS and touchTime and Date.

2. Touch Clock Display and touchOFF or ON to turn the clockdisplay off or on.


The clock settings can also beaccessed by touching the timedisplay, then touching Set.

Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

The vehicle has two 12-volt outletsthat can be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

The power outlets are located:

. On the center stack below theclimate controls.

. In the rear cargo area.

Lift the cover to access the outletand replace when not in use.



{ Warning

Power is always supplied to therear cargo power outlet. Do notleave electrical equipmentplugged in when the vehicle is notin use because the vehicle couldcatch fire and cause injury ordeath.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the ignition is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.

Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 283.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110V/120VAlternating Current

If equipped with this power outlet itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is on the rear ofthe center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is on,equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off or if theequipment is not fully seated intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and the



indicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 226. Thepower restarts when equipmentusing 150 watts or less is pluggedinto the outlet and a system fault isnot detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps

. Medical equipment

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

Base Level English, Metric Similar



Midlevel English, Metric Similar



Uplevel English Standard Theme, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Usew orx to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed.See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base and Midlevel) 0 145or Driver Information Center(DIC) (Uplevel) 0 148.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Options

Audio

Press V to select the Audio app,

then press p to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Useworx to change the station or go tothe next or previous track.

Phone

Press V to select the Phone app,

then press p to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recent

calls, or scroll through contacts.If there is an active call, mute thephone or switch to handsetoperation.

Navigation

Press V to select the Navigation

app, then press p to enter theNavigation menu. If there is noactive route, you can resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an activeroute, press V to cancel or resumeroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Options

Press V to select the Options app,

then press p to enter the Options

menu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Options menu.

Units : Press p while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose English, Imperial, or metricunits by pressing V while the



desired item is highlighted.A checkmark will be displayed nextto the selected item.

Display Themes (Uplevel) : Thereare two instrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from: Sportand Touring.

Info Pages : Press p while InfoPages is displayed to enter the InfoPages menu and select the items tobe displayed in the Info app.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base and Midlevel) 0 145 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Uplevel)0 148.

Speed Warning : The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warningpress p when Speed Warning isdisplayed.

For the Base and Midlevel Cluster,pressw orx to adjust the value.

Press V to set the speed.

For the Uplevel Cluster, scroll to setspeed and press p. Pressw orxto adjust the value. Press V to setthe speed.

Once the speed is set, this featurecan be turned off by pressing Vwhile viewing this page. If theselected speed limit is exceeded, apop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Software Information : Displaysopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base and Midlevel) 0 145 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Uplevel)0 148.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

For vehicles with the Stop/Startsystem, when the ignition is on, thetachometer indicates the vehiclestatus. When pointing to AUTOSTOP, the engine is off but thevehicle is on and can move. Theengine could auto start at any time.When the indicator points to OFF,the vehicle is off.



When the engine is on, thetachometer will indicate the engine’srevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm’s, during Auto Stopmode, when the engine is shuttingoff and restarting.

Fuel Gauge

Metric Base Level Shown, MidlevelSimilar

English Base Level Shown,Midlevel Similar

Metric Uplevel

English Uplevel

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There is asmall amount of fuel left, but the fueltank should be filled soon.



Here are things that some ownersask about. None of these show aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge indicated the tank washalf full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half thetank's capacity to fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric Base Level Shown, MidlevelSimilar

English Base Level Shown,Midlevel Similar

Metric Uplevel



English Uplevel

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the pointer moves toward thewarning area at the high end of thegauge, the engine is too hot.

If the engine coolant hasoverheated and the vehicle hasbeen operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating 0 300.

Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 85.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger seat belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger seat beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seat



such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe seat belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 78.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 85 for important

safety information. The overheadconsole has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.


Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol, to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.



If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Light 0 135 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inService Mode. See IgnitionPositions 0 221.



Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 286.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow the

previous guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Fillingthe Tank with a Portable GasCan” under Filling the Tank0 269. The diagnostic systemcan detect if the adapter hasbeen left installed in the vehicle,allowing fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the adapter removedmay turn off the light.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require at



least one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 268.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 283. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is inService Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a brake problem.



{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when theparking brake is applied. If the lightcontinues flashing after the parkingbrake is released, or while driving,there is a problem with the Electric

Parking Brake system. A messagemay also display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light (Uplevel andMidlevel Cluster Only)

On some vehicles the serviceelectric parking brake light shouldcome on briefly when the vehicle isstarted. If it does not come on, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem. For vehicles withthe reconfigurable cluster, this lightmay not come on when the vehicleis started.

If this light stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to a dealer as soonas possible. See Electric Parking

Brake 0 234. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.



If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 138.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 232.

Hill Descent Control Light

If equipped, the Hill Descent Controllight comes on when the system isready for use. When the lightflashes, the system is active.

See Hill Descent Control (HDC)0 238.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert, to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 266.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 257.



Pedestrian AheadIndicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay amber when a nearbypedestrian is detected directly infront of the vehicle.


Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your

dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)button.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak/ESCis turned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel speed willbe limited when necessary toprotect the driveline from damage.Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system is turned off.If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak/ESCsystems, and the warning lightturns off.




Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESCsystem is actively working.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. Stop as soon as possible,and inflate the tires to the pressurevalue shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 326.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 329.

Engine Oil Pressure LightOil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, and oilviscosity.

On some models, the oil pump willvary engine oil pressure accordingto engine needs. Oil pressure maychange quickly as the engine speedor load varies. This is normal. If theoil pressure warning light or DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageindicates oil pressure outside thenormal operating range, check thevehicle's oil as soon as possible.



Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light(Base Level)

Metric Shown, English Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

Low Fuel Warning Light(Midlevel and Uplevel)

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 48.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 166.

IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior LampControls 0 164.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 168 for more information.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 164.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.



See Cruise Control 0 240.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) ison and ready, and turns green whenthe ACC is set and active. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 243.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base and Midlevel)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info app. See Instrument Cluster0 127. The displays show the statusof many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the rightsteering wheel control.




DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theOptions application.

3. Press V to enter theOptions menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to movethrough the list of possibleinformation displays.



6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select ordeselect that item. When anitem is selected, a checkmarkwill appear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Optionsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.

Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph).

Trip A or Trip B : Shows thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

This also shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since the

last time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the trip odometerand the average fuel economy. TripA and Trip B can also be reset bypressing p and choosing reset.

Fuel Range : Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Remaining Oil Life : Shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 291.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 375.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press andhold V for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 293.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber.



See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 328 and Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 329.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy(Mid-Level) : Displays the currentfuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. Thisdisplay cannot be reset.

Average Vehicle Speed : Displaysthe average vehicle speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset. Reset the average speedby pressing V when it is displayed.

Fuel Economy : The centerdisplays the approximateinstantaneous fuel economy as anumber and bar graph. Displayedabove the bar graph is a runningaverage of fuel economy for themost recently traveled selected

distance. Displayed below the bargraph is the best average fueleconomy that has been achieved forthe selected distance. The selecteddistance is displayed at the top ofthe page as “last xxx mi/km.”

Press p to select the distance or

reset best value. Usew andx to

choose the distance and press V.

Pressw andx to select “Reset

Best Score.” Press V to reset thebest average fuel economy. Afterreset, the best value displays “-,-”until the selected distance has beentraveled.

The display provides information onhow current driving behavior affectsthe running average and how wellrecent driving compares to the bestthat has been achieved for theselected distance.

Economy Trend : Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the most

recent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset throughthe menu.

ECO Index : Provides feedback onthe efficiency of current drivingbehavior. The bar graph shows avalue that is based on current fuelconsumption compared to what isexpected from the vehicle with goodand bad driving habits.

Timer : This display can be used asa timer. To start the timer, press Vwhile this display is active. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, press Vbriefly while this display is activeand the timer is running. To resetthe timer to zero, press and hold Vwhile this display is active, or pressp and select reset.

Speed Limit (Mid-Level) : Showssign information, which comes froma roadway database in the onboardnavigation, if equipped.



Battery Voltage : Displays thecurrent battery voltage, if equipped.Battery voltage changes are normalwhile driving. See Charging SystemLight 0 136. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message.

Transmission FluidTemperature : Shows thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Blank Page : Shows noinformation.

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Uplevel)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info app. See Instrument Cluster0 127. The displays show the statusof many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the rightsteering wheel control.




DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theOptions application.

3. Press V to enter theOptions menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to movethrough the list of possibleinformation displays.

6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select ordeselect that item. When anitem is selected, a checkmarkwill appear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Optionsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.



Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown onthis page.

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed :Shows the current distance traveled,in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change.

The Average Speed display showsthe average speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average is

calculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the trip odometer,the average fuel economy, and theaverage speed. Or press p andselect reset in the menu.

Fuel Range and InstantaneousFuel Economy : Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change.

Timer and Fuel Used : Can beused as a timer. To start the timer,press V while this display is active.The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset. To stop the timer,press V briefly while this display isactive and the timer is running. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold V while this display is active.

This also shows the number ofliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel usedsince the last reset of thismenu item.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 291.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is



recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 375.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press andhold V for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 293.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber.See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 328 and Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 329.

Best Fuel Economy : Displaysaverage fuel economy, the best fueleconomy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press p to change the selected

distance. Press and hold V whilethis display is active to reset thebest fuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Top Consumers : Shows a list ofthe features that are currentlyimpacting the fuel economy, in orderfrom highest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.

Economy Trend : Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the mostrecent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset throughthe menu.

ECO Index : Provides feedback onthe efficiency of current drivingbehavior. The bar graph shows avalue that is based on current fuelconsumption compared to what isexpected from the vehicle with goodand bad driving habits.

Speed Signs : Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Off Road : Displays vehicle pitchand roll information, road wheelangle, and four-wheel drive (4WD)status.

Following Distance : The followingdistance to a moving vehicle aheadin your path is indicated in followingtime in seconds. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 257.

Blank Page : Shows noinformation.

Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge : Shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears,see your dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Steering

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power isreduced. Reduced propulsion powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no observed reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance may

be reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenwhile this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that thevehicle speed has been limited tothe speed displayed. The limitedspeed is a protection for variouspropulsion and vehicle systems,such as lubrication, thermal,suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.



VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Base Radio Audio SystemControls

{ : Press to access theHome Page.

Q or R : Touch to scroll through themenus or setup items.

0 : Touch to exit or return to theprevious screen or menu.

Uplevel Radio Audio SystemControls

1. Touch the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Select the desired featuresetting.

3. Press o BACK on the center

stack or touch 0 to return tothe previous menu or exit.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Rear Seat Reminder

. Language

. Valet Mode

. Teen Driver

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Apple CarPlay

. Android Auto

. USB Auto Launch

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

. Wi-Fi

Each menu is detailed in thefollowing information.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 123.

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and amessage when the rear door hasbeen opened before or duringoperation of the vehicle.

Select Off or On.

Language

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition will reflect the selectedlanguage.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit access to vehiclestorage locations, if equipped.



To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back togo back to the previous menu.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings”in the infotainment manual.

Radio

Touch and the following maydisplay:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Text Scroll

. Tone Settings

. Auto Volume

. Bose Audio Pilot

. Maximum Startup Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Touch to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Text Scroll

Select to see text scroll on thescreen.

Select Off or On.

Tone Settings

Select to adjust the radio tone. SeeOperation 0 176 or “Tone Settings”under “AM-FM Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Bose Audio Pilot

This feature adjusts the volumebased on the noise in the vehicle.See “Bose AudioPilot NoiseCompensation Technology” under“Infotainment System Settings” inthe infotainment manual.

Select Off or On.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level.



To set the maximum startup volume,touch + or − to increase ordecrease.

Vehicle

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Cooled Seats

. Auto Heated Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Cooled Seats

This setting automatically turns onand regulates the ventilated seatswhen the cabin temperature iswarm. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats 0 64.

Select Off or On.

Auto Heated Seats

This setting automatically turns onand regulates the heated seatswhen the cabin temperature is cool.The auto heated seats can beturned off by using the heated seatbuttons on the center stack. SeeHeated and Ventilated Front Seats0 64.

If equipped with Auto HeatedSteering Wheel, this feature will turnon when the Auto Heated Seatsturn on.

Select Off or On.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the front defog willautomatically react to temperatureand humidity conditions that maycause fogging.

Select Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this allows the AutoRear Defog to be turned on or off.This feature will automatically turnon the rear window defogger when itis cold outside.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingmay be displayed if equipped:

. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Front Pedestrian Detection

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Lane Change Alert



Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision, LaneDeparture Warning, Adaptive CruiseControl, Park Assist, and BackingWarning alerts.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This feature will turn on or off theForward Collision Alert (FCA) andForward Automatic Braking (FAB).The Off setting disables all FCA andFAB functions. With the Alert andBrake setting, both FCA and FABare available. The Alert settingdisables FAB. See ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) 0 259.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.

Front Pedestrian Detection

This feature may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes with nearbypedestrians.


Select Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the Rear Cross TrafficAlert feature to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then thatvehicle drives on.

Select Off or On.

Lane Change Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Lane Change Alert(LCA) 0 264.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Hands Free Liftgate Control

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

. Extended Hill Start Assist

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored1 or 2 button positions when theignition is changed from off to on orACC/ACCESSORY. See MemorySeats 0 61.

Select Off or On.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recallsthe previously stored Exit buttonposition when exiting the vehicle.See Memory Seats 0 61.

Select Off or On.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Touch + or − to adjust the volume.



Hands Free Liftgate Control

The liftgate may be operated with akicking motion under the left cornerof the rear bumper. See Liftgate0 41.

Select Off, On-Open and Close,or On-Open Only.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger, driver, or passengeroutside mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse) or theengine is turned off. See ReverseTilt Mirrors 0 50.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is on,the rear wiper will automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is shiftedto R (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Extended Hill Start Assist

This allows the duration of the HillStart Assist to be changed. See HillStart Assist (HSA) 0 235.

Select Extended Hold orStandard Hold.

Lighting


. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of theexterior lamps and most of theinterior lamps to turn on brieflywhen K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressedto locate the vehicle.

Select Off or On.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks


. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Select Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).



Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start


. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the ventilated seatson when using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

If equipped with Auto HeatedSteering Wheel, this feature will turnon when the Remote Start AutoHeated Seats turn on.

Select Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature enables theremote operation of all windowsfrom the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Window Operation” inPower Windows 0 51.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.



Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle. This menu also enablesRemote No Longer In Vehicle Alert.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth


. Device Information

. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Change Pairing PIN

. Ringtones

. Sort Order

. Voice Mail Numbers

. Text Message Alerts

Device Information

See information about the devicename, address, and PIN code.

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Change Pairing PIN

Select to change the PIN of adevice.

Ringtones

Select to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.

Sort Order

Select to change the order of thecontacts list.

Select First/Last or Last/First.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT. Type a new number,then select SAVE.

Text Message Alerts

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off or On.

Apple CarPlay


. Apple CarPlay

. Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Apple CarPlay

This feature allows Apple devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Select to manage Apple devices.Apple CarPlay must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.



Android Auto


. Android Auto

. Manage Android Auto Devices

Android Auto

This feature allows Android devicesto be connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Android Auto Devices

Select to manage Android devices.Android Auto must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

USB Auto Launch

This allows Android and AppleCarPlay devices to automaticallyconnect when plugged into theUSB port.

Select Off or On.

Voice


. Confidence Threshold

. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

. Display “What Can I Say?” Tips

Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustmentof the sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Confirm More orConfirm Less.

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display “What Can I Say?” Tips

This feature gives voicecommand tips.

Select Off or On.

Display


. Mode

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display screenfor day or night driving.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Touchanywhere on the infotainmentdisplay or press any infotainmentcontrols on the center stack to turnthe display on.



Rear Camera

This allows for Rear Park AssistSymbols and Guidance Lines to beturned off or on.

Select Off or On for the desiredfeature.


Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Touch to view the version of theinfotainment system software.

Wi-Fi


. Wi-Fi

. Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Wi-Fi

This feature allows Wi-Fi networksto be turned off or on.

Select Off or On.

Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Select to manage Wi-Fi networks.Wi-Fi must be on for this feature tobe accessed.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 400.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. These



instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quicker andmore accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S.A, Canada,or Puerto Rico, international rateswill apply and may differ based onlandline or mobile phone.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Donot release either button untilthe indicator light changes froma slow to a rapid flash. Thenrelease both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals for SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.


162 Instruments and Controls. If the indicator light does

not come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for two seconds, thenrelease it. If the garage doordoes not move or the lamp onthe garage door openerreceiver does not flash, press

and hold the same button asecond time for two seconds,then release it. Again, if thedoor does not move or thegarage door lamp does notflash, press and hold the samebutton a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Some GateOperators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S.A, Canada,or Puerto Rico, international rateswill apply and may differ based onlandline or mobile phone.

Some radio-frequency laws andgate operators require transmittersignals to time out or quit afterseveral seconds of transmission.



This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


164 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 164Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Headlamp High/Low-Beam

Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Automatic Headlamp

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 168Turn and Lane-Change

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Interior LightingInstrument Panel Illumination

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Battery Load Management . . . 171Battery Power Protection . . . . . 171Exterior Lighting Battery

Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns the exterior lamps off anddeactivates the AUTO mode. Turnto O again to reactivate theAUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.


Lighting 165

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

IntelliBeam® System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This lightb comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,press the button on the end of theturn signal lever when the exteriorlamp control is in the AUTO or2position. The blue high-beam onlight appears on the instrumentcluster when the high beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield thatautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system isdisabled by the button on theturn signal lever. If this happens,press the button on the end ofthe turn signal lever when theexterior lamp control is in theAUTO or2 position. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated.


166 Lighting

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. Driving on winding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer3 : Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you and release, to turn thehigh beams on. To return to lowbeams, push the lever again or pullit toward you and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow-beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

If equipped, the DRL will come onwhen all of the following conditionsare met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.


Lighting 167. The parking brake is released or

the vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL are on, the taillampsand other lamps will not be on.

The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to O or theignition is off. For vehicles first soldin Canada, the DRL can only beturned off when the vehicle isparked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL).During that delay, the instrumentcluster may not be as bright asusual. Make sure the instrument

panel brightness control is in the fullbright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control 0 169.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to DRL.

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

For vehicles sold in Canada, thiscontrol only works when thetransmission is in P (Park).

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to Oor; to disable this feature.


168 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The turn and lane-change signalcan be turned off manually bymoving the lever back to its originalposition.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers 0 310.

Fog Lamps

Use the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

# : Turn the band down andrelease to turn the fog lamps on oroff. A light comes on in theinstrument cluster when the foglamps are in use. The ignition mustbe on for the fog lamps to work.


Lighting 169

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps turn off.The fog lamps come back on againwhen the high-beam headlamps areturned off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come on whenany door is opened unless the domelamp override is activated. Todeactivate the dome lamp override,pressj OFF and the indicatorlight on the button will turn off.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp is in the overheadconsole.

To operate, press the followingbuttons:

j OFF : Press to turn off thedome lamps when a door is open.An indicator light on the button willturn on when the dome lampoverride is activated. PressjOFF again to deactivate this featureand the indicator light will turn off.The dome lamps will come on whenthe doors are opened.


170 Lighting

+ ON/OFF : Press to turn the domelamps on manually.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps on the overhead console andin the headliner. These lamps comeon when any door is opened.

Front Reading Lamps

Press the lamp lenses to turn thefront reading lamps on or off.

Rear Reading Lamps

Press the buttons to turn the rearpassenger reading lamps on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and most ofthe interior lights turn on briefly atnight, or in areas of limited lightingwhen K is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29. When thedriver door is opened, all controllights, Driver Information Center(DIC) lights, and door pocket lightsturn on. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off, then theremaining interior lights dim to off.Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by turning the ignition onor to ACC/ACCESSORY, or bypressing Q on the RKE transmitter.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.


Lighting 171

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlights come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The dome lamp comeson after the ignition is turned off.The exterior lamps and dome lampremain on for a set amount of time,then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 152.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.

When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, rearwindow defogger, climate control fanat high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loadsplugged into accessory poweroutlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.

It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC battery voltageand charging message displays. It isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base and Midlevel) 0 145 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Uplevel)0 148.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.


172 Lighting

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the off position and then back tothe parking lamp or headlampposition.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.


Infotainment System 173

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 174Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 181

Audio PlayersUSB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . . 188Bluetooth (Infotainment

Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Apple CarPlay and

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with the features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling some


174 Infotainment System

functions when driving. Thesefunctions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:

. Become familiar with theoperation, center stack controls,and infotainment displaycontrols.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlecontrol or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving 0 207.

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 226.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces enginenoise in the vehicle’s interior. ANCrequires the factory-installed audiosystem, radio, speakers, amplifier (ifequipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by yourdealer if related aftermarketequipment is installed.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe infotainment system has anelectronic security system installedto prevent theft.

The infotainment system only worksin the vehicle in which it was firstinstalled, and cannot be used inanother vehicle.



Overview 1. {. Press to go to the Home

Page. See “Home Page”later in this section.

2. 7. Radio: Press and release to

go to the previous station orchannel. Press and hold tofast seek the next strongestprevious station or channel.

. USB/BT Music/Pictures:Press and hold to go to theprevious content. Press andhold to fast rewind.

3. O. Press to turn the power on.

. Press and hold to turn thepower off.

. Press to mute/unmute thesystem when on.

. Turn to decrease orincrease the volume.



4. 6. Radio: Press and release to

go to the next station orchannel. Press and hold tofast seek the next strongeststation or channel.

. USB/BT Music/Pictures:Press and hold to go to thenext content. Press andhold to fast forward.

5. v

. Press and release toaccess the phone screen,answer an incoming call,or access the device homescreen.

Home Page

Infotainment Display Buttons

Infotainment display buttons showon the screen when available. Whena function is unavailable, the buttonmay gray out. When a function isselected, the button may highlight.

Home Page Features

Press { to go to the Home Page.

Audio : Touch to select AM, FM,SiriusXM (if equipped), USB/iPod/Bluetooth Audio, or AUX.

Gallery : Touch to view a picture.

Phone : Touch to activate thephone features (if equipped).See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) 0 189 or Bluetooth(Overview) 0 188.

Projection : Touch to accesssupported (Android Auto/CarPlay)devices when connected. See USBPort 0 181.

Settings : Touch to access thePersonalization menu. See VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

OnStar : If equipped, touch toaccess the OnStar menu. SeeOnStar Overview 0 404.

Operation

Radio Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the center stack controls,menus shown on the display, andsteering wheel controls.

Turning the System On or Off

O : Press to turn the radio on.Press and hold to turn the radio off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is off, thesystem will turn off automaticallyafter 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O : Turn to increase or decrease.Press when the system is on tomute and unmute the system.



System Settings

Auto Volume

This feature automatically adjuststhe radio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the feature canbe turned off.

Auto Volume Settings

1. Touch SETTINGS on theHome Page.

2. Select Radio.

3. Select Auto Volume andchoose between selections.

4. Touch Back on the infotainmentdisplay to go back to thesource screen.

Tone Settings

The tone settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

Custom Tone Settings

1. Touch SETTINGS on theHome Page.

2. Select Radio.

3. Select Tone Settings.

. Bass, Midrange, or Treble:Touch − or +.

. Fader or Balance: Adjustthe front/rear or left/rightspeakers by dragging thedot in the vehicle image onthe display.

4. Touch Back on the infotainmentdisplay to go back to thesource screen.

Software Updates

Over-the-Air Software Updates

If equipped, the infotainment systemcan download and install selectsoftware updates over a wirelessconnection. The system will promptfor certain updates to bedownloaded and installed. There isalso an option to check for updatesmanually.

To manually check for updates,touch SETTINGS on the HomePage, followed by SoftwareInformation, and then System

Update. Follow the on-screenprompts. Steps for downloading andinstalling updates may vary byvehicle.

Downloading Over-the-Air vehiclesoftware updates requires Internetconnectivity, which can be accessedthrough the vehicle’s built-in OnStar4G LTE connection, if equipped andactive. If required, data plans areprovided by a third party. Optionally,a secure Wi-Fi hotspot such as acompatible mobile device hotspot,home hotspot or public hotspot canbe used. Applicable data rates mayapply.

To connect the infotainment systemto a secured mobile device hotspot,home hotspot, or a public hotspot,touch SETTINGS on the HomePage, followed by Wi-Fi, and thenManage Wi-Fi Networks. Select theappropriate Wi-Fi network, andfollow the on-screen prompts.Download speeds may vary.



On most compatible mobile devices,activation of the Wi-Fi hotspot is inthe Settings menu under MobileNetwork Sharing, Personal Hotspot,Mobile Hotspot or similar.

Availability of Over-the-Air vehiclesoftware updates varies by vehicleand country. For more informationon this feature, see my.gmc.com/learn.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

Audio Source Menu

{ : Press to go to the Home Page.

O : Press to turn on, mute,or unmute the system. Press andhold to turn off the system.

Selecting a Band

1. Press {.

2. Touch AUDIO.

3. Touch Source.

4. Select AM or FM.

The last station that was playingstarts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Press7 or6 to automaticallysearch for available radio stations.

Direct Tune

From the AM or FM menu:

1. Touch Tune.

2. Enter the station number.

3. Touch Go.

Favorites

1. Touch S or T to scroll throughthe favorite pages.

2. Touch the station to select it.

Update Station List

. From the AM or FM menu, touchMenu, then touch Update StationList. The broadcasting listupdating will begin.

. During the AM or FMbroadcasting list update, touchCancel to stop the updates.

Station List

1. From the AM or FM menu,touch Menu.

2. Select Station List.



3. Touch Q or R to scroll throughthe list. Touch the station toselect it.

Menu

Touch to choose between availablemenus for the current source.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to 25 stations can be stored.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, touch the correspondingpreset 1−5 until a beep is heard.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Touch S or T to select thedesired page of savedfavorites.

3. Touch and hold any of thepresets to save the currentradio station to that location ofthe selected favorites page.

To change a preset, tune to the newdesired radio station and touch andhold the preset.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, vehicles with aSiriusXM Satellite Radio tuner and avalid SiriusXM Satellite Radiosubscription can receive SiriusXMprogramming.


SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.During your trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to SiriusXM Radio Online forwhen you are not in the vehicle.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. If SiriusXMservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel SXM1.

For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or1-888-601-6296 (U.S.), andwww.siriusxm.ca or 1-877-438-9677(Canada).

Listening to SiriusXM Radio

1. Press {.

2. Touch AUDIO.

3. Touch Source.

4. Touch SXM and the mostrecent listened to SiriusXMchannel will display.

Selecting a Category

From Menu, touch Categories, thentouch the desired category or fromCategories, touch Q or R to find thedesired channel. Touch the channelto select it.

Selecting a Channel

Press7 or6 to seek the previousor next channel.



Using the Presets

Up to five favorites pages can besaved, and each page can store upto five channels.

To change a preset, tune to the newdesired channel then touch and holdthe preset.

Listening to Preset Channels

1. Touch S or T repeatedly toselect the desiredfavorites page.

2. Touch the preset to listen to thechannel.

Using the SiriusXM Menu

Operation

1. Touch MENU on the SXM radioscreen.

2. Touch the menu to select thedesired item or to display thedetail menu item.

3. Touch Back on the infotainmentdisplay to return to theprevious menu.

Channel List

1. Touch Channel List from theSXM menu. The channel list isdisplayed.

2. Touch Q or R to find thedesired channel. Touch thechannel to select it.

Tone Settings

1. Touch Tone Settings. See“Tone Settings” underOperation 0 176.

2. Touch Back on the infotainmentdisplay.

Auto Volume

1. Touch Auto Volume. See “AutoVolume” under Operation0 176.

2. Touch Back on the infotainmentdisplay.

Categories

1. Touch Categories.

2. Touch Q or R to find thedesired category. Touch thecategory to select it.

Explicit Content Filter

When on, only a filtered list ofchannels will be received. When off,all regular SXM programmingsubscribed to will be received.

1. Touch SXM Explicit Filter.

2. Select to enable or disable.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as mobilephone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,



especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.


SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,the SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it isopen, reception can also beaffected.

Audio Players

USB Port

Using the USB Port

The infotainment system can playmusic by connecting an auxiliarydevice to the USB port.

USB Support

If equipped, the USB ports are inthe center stack, and use theUSB 2.0 standard.

USB Supported Devices

. USB Flash Drives

. Portable USB Hard Drives

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod,see www.apple.com/support.



The USB port can play both lowerand upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg,and .wav files stored on a USBstorage device.

Supported Apple Devices

To view supported devices in theU.S., see my.gmc.com/learn.

To view supported devices inCanada, see gmcowner.ca.

To view supported devices inMexico, see gmc.com.mx/gmcintellilink.html.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The infotainment system supports:

. FAT16

. FAT32

. exFAT

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod/iPhone

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB port.

To connect an iPod/iPhone, connectone end of the device’s cable to theiPod/iPhone and the other end tothe USB port.

The iPod/iPhone charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. See IgnitionPositions 0 221. When the vehicle isturned off, the iPod/iPhoneautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

For more information on USBusage, see “Audio SystemInformation” following.

Audio System Information

The infotainment system can playthe music files contained in the USBstorage device or iPod/iPhoneproducts.

Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files

. Music files with .mp3, .wma,.ogg, and .wav file nameextensions can be played.

. MP3 files that can be played: Bitrate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps.Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05kHz, and 16 kHz.

. Files with a bit rate above128 kbps will result in higherquality sound.

. ID3 Tag information for MP3files, such as the album nameand the artist, can be played.

. To display album title, track title,and artist information, the fileshould be compatible with theID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats.

Using USB Storage Devices andiPod/iPhone

. Use a USB or flash memory typestorage device. Do not connectusing a USB adaptor.

. Do not connect and reconnectthe USB device repeatedly in ashort time, as this may causestatic electricity and problemsusing the device.

. Use a USB device with a metalconnecting terminal.


Infotainment System 183. Connection with i-Stick Type

USB storage devices may befaulty due to vehicle vibration.

. Do not touch the USBconnecting terminal.

. Only USB storage devicesformatted in FAT16/32 or exFATfile systems are recognized.NTFS and other file systems arenot recognized.

. The time it takes to process fileswill depend on the USB storagedevice type and capacity, andthe type of files stored.

. Some USB storage device filesmay not be compatible.

. Up to two USB devices and oneiPod can be played through aUSB hub. All devices may not besupported, depending on theperformance of the USB hub.If there is not enough powersupply, it may not operatenormally.

. Do not disconnect the USBstorage device while it is playing.This may cause damage to theproduct or affect theperformance of the USB device.

. Disconnect the USB storagedevice when the ignition isturned off. If the ignition is turnedon while the USB device isconnected, the USB device maybe damaged or may not operatenormally.

. USB storage devices can onlybe connected for playing music,viewing photo files,or upgrading.

. Do not use the USB terminal tocharge USB accessoryequipment. The heat generatedmay cause performance issuesor damage.

. Music files to which Digital RightManagement (DRM) is appliedcannot be played.

. USB storage devices can have acapacity with a limit of 5,000files, such as music, photo,video, 15 stages of folder

structure. Normal usage cannotbe guaranteed for a storagedevice that exceeds this limit.The iPod/iPhone can play allmusic files that are supported.The music file lists will onlydisplay up to 5,000 files on thescreen. These files are sorted inalphabetical order.

. Some iPod/iPhone productmodels may not support theconnectivity or functionality ofthis product.

. Only connect the iPod/iPhonewith connection cablessupported by iPod/iPhoneproducts. Other connectioncables cannot be used.

. The iPod/iPhone may bedamaged if it is connected to thevehicle with the ignition on.When not in use, disconnect theiPod/iPhone.

. When the iPod/iPhone isconnected to the USB port byusing the iPod/iPhone cable, theBluetooth music is notsupported.


184 Infotainment System. The iPod/iPhone playback

functions and the informationdisplayed may be different whenplayed on the infotainmentsystem.

. Refer to the table for theclassification items related to thesearch function provided by theiPod/iPhone.

USB Player

Playing Music from a USB Device

. Connect the USB device to theUSB port.

. Play will start automatically afterthe system has finished readingthe USB device.

. If a non-readable USB device isconnected, an error messagedisplays and the system willswitch to the previous audiofunction.

If the USB device is alreadyconnected:

1. Press {.

2. Touch AUDIO.

3. Touch Source.

4. Touch USB.

To stop the USB device and selectanother media source, touchSource, then select the othersource.

To remove the USB device, selectanother function, then remove theUSB device.

Pause

. Touch j to pause.

. Touch r to resume.

Changing to Next/Previous Files

. Touchl to change to thenext file.

. Touchg within five seconds ofthe playback time to play theprevious file.

Returning to the Beginning of theCurrent File

Touchg after five seconds of theplayback time.

Scanning Forward or Backward

Touch and holdg orl duringplayback to rewind or fast forward.Release the button to resumeplayback at normal speed.

Playing a File Randomly

Touch Z during playback.

. ON: Plays all files randomly.

. OFF: Returns to normalplayback.

Using the USB Music Menu

. Touch Menu during playback.



. Touch the desired menu.

Browse Music

1. Touch Browse Music.

2. Touch the desired music.

Tone Settings

. Touch Tone Settings. The ToneSettings menu is displayed. See“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls” in Operation 0 176.

Auto Volume

. Touch Auto Volume. The AutoVolume menu is displayed. See“Auto Volume” under “RadioControls” in Operation 0 176.

Traffic Program (If Equipped)

. Touch On or Off.

MTP (Media Transfer Protocol)

. Connect an MTP supporteddevice.

. Play will start automatically afterthe system has finished readingthe MTP device.

. If a non-readable MTP device isconnected, an error messagedisplays and the system willswitch to the previous audiofunction.

iPod/iPhone Player

This feature is limited to modelssupporting the iPod/iPhoneconnection.

Playing Music Files

. Connect the iPod/iPhone to theUSB port.

. Play will start from the previouslyplayed point after the systemhas finished reading the USBdevice.

. If a non-readable USB device isconnected, an error messagedisplays and the system willswitch to the previous audiofunction.

If the iPod/iPhone is alreadyconnected:

1. Press {.

2. Touch AUDIO.

3. Touch Source.

4. Touch iPod.

To stop the device and selectanother media source, touchSource, then select the othersource.

To remove the device, selectanother function, then remove thedevice.

Pause

. Touch j to pause.

. Touch r to resume.



Changing to the Next/Previous Song

. Touchl to change to thenext song.

. Touchg within two seconds ofthe playback time to play theprevious file.

Returning to the Beginning of theCurrent File

Touchg after two seconds of theplayback time.

Scanning Forward or Backward

Touch and holdg orl duringplayback to rewind or fast forward.Release the button to resumeplayback at normal speed.

Playing a File Randomly

Touch Z during playback.

. ON: Plays all files randomly.

. OFF: Returns to normalplayback.

Using the iPod Menu

. Touch Menu during playback.

. Touch the appropriateplay mode.

Browse Music

1. Touch Browse Music.

2. Touch the desired music.

Tone Settings

. Touch Tone Settings. The ToneSettings menu is displayed. See“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls” in Operation 0 176.

Auto Volume

. Touch Auto Volume. The AutoVolume menu is displayed. See“Auto Volume” under “RadioControls” in Operation 0 176.

Picture System Information

The infotainment system can viewpicture files stored on a USBstorage device and devices thatsupport Media TransferProtocol (MTP).

. Supported file extensions: .jpg,.bmp, .png, .gif.

. Animated GIF files are notsupported.

. Some files may not operate dueto a different recording format orthe condition of the file.

Viewing Pictures

1. Connect the USB device to theUSB port.

2. Touch the screen to open to fullscreen. Touch the screen againto return to the previousscreen.

If the USB device is alreadyconnected:

1. Press {.

2. Touch GALLERY.

Some features are disabled whilethe vehicle is in motion.

Viewing a Slide Show

1. Touchz from the picturescreen.

2. Touch the screen to cancel theslide show during the slideshow playback.



Viewing a Previous or NextPicture

Touch S or T from the picturescreen.

Rotating a Picture

Touch w from the picture screen.

Enlarging a Picture

Touchx from the picture screen.

Using the USB Picture Menu

1. Touch MENU from the picturescreen.

2. Touch the appropriate menu:

. Slide Show Time: Allowsselection of the slide showinterval.

. Clock, Temp. Display:Allows selection of On orOff to show the clock andtemperature on the fullscreen.

. Display Settings: Adjustsfor Brightness and Contrast.

3. Touch Back on the infotainmentdisplay to exit.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Settings menus and functions mayvary depending on vehicle options.

The auxiliary input jack can be usedto connect external audio devicessuch as an iPod®, iPhone®, MP3player, CD player, and othersupported devices for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

The auxiliary input jack is in thecenter stack. The infotainmentsystem can play music connectedby the auxiliary device.

Play will begin when the system hasfinished reading the information onthe device.

Playing Music

To play music from the device, if thedevice is already connected:

1. Press {.

2. Touch AUDIO.

3. Touch Source.

4. Touch AUX.

To adjust the tone settings, see“Tone Settings” in Operation 0 176.



Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)If equipped with Bluetooth capability,the system can interact with manyBluetooth phones, PDAs, or otherdevices to:

. Place and receive hands-freecalls.

. Transmit hands-free data.

. Play audio streaming files.

The device must be paired first. See“Pairing” under “Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)” later in thissection.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing”under “Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)” later in this section.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system is used tocontrol the system. The system canbe used while the ignition is on or inACC/ACCESSORY. See IgnitionPositions 0 221. Not all phones

support all functions and not allphones work with the Bluetoothsystem. In the U.S. and Canada,see www.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

The Bluetooth system range can beup to 9.1 m (30 ft).

There may be restrictions on usingBluetooth wireless technology insome locations.

Due to the variety of Bluetoothdevices and their firmware versions,the device may respond differentlywhen performing over Bluetooth.

On a current phone call, an imageof the current contact from thephone's contact list may bedisplayed. Not all phones arecompatible with this feature.

Refer to the cell phonemanufacturer’s user guide forquestions about the phone'sBluetooth functionality.



Bluetooth Controls

If equipped with Bluetooth capability,use the infotainment controls on thecenter stack and the steering wheelto operate the system.


See Steering Wheel Controls 0 119.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)To use infotainment controls toaccess the menu system, seeOverview 0 175.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview 0 404.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to 10 cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first paired.

When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, the phone bookis downloaded automatically. This isdependent on the type of phone

paired. If the automatic downloaddoes not occur, proceed with thephone book download on thephone.

Pairing a Phone – SSP and NoPaired Device

When there is no paired device onthe infotainment system and SimpleSecure Pairing (SSP) is supported:

1. Press {.

2. Touch PHONE, or press g onthe steering wheel withoutOnStar.

3. Touch Search Device.

4. Touch the desired device topair on the searched listscreen.

5. Touch Yes on the pop-upscreen of the Bluetooth deviceand infotainment system.

6. When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, the phonescreen is displayed on theinfotainment system.



Pairing a Phone – SSP and PairedDevice

When a paired device is on theinfotainment system and SSP issupported:

1. Press {.

2. Touch SETTINGS.

3. Touch Bluetooth, then DeviceManagement.

4. Touch the desired device topair. When the Bluetoothdevice and infotainment systemare successfully paired, Z / 5is displayed on the pair devicescreen. If no desired device isavailable go to Step 5.

5. Touch Search Device to searchfor the desired device.


7. Touch Yes on the pop-upscreen of the Bluetooth deviceand infotainment system.

. The connected phone ishighlighted by 5.

. Z / 5 indicates the hands-freeand phone music functions areenabled.

. 5 indicates only the hands-freefunction is enabled.

. Z indicates only Bluetoothmusic is enabled.

Pairing a Phone – No SSP and NoPaired Device

When there is no paired device onthe infotainment system and SSP isnot supported:

1. Press {.

2. Touch PHONE, or press g onthe steering wheel withoutOnStar.

3. Touch Search Device.


5. Input the PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)code (default: 1234) to theBluetooth device. When theBluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, thePHONE screen is displayed onthe infotainment system.

When the connection fails, a failuremessage is displayed on theinfotainment system.

If a Bluetooth device was previouslyconnected, the infotainment systemexecutes the auto connection.However, if the Bluetooth setting onthe Bluetooth device is turned off, afailure message is displayed on theinfotainment system.

Pairing a Phone – No SSP andPaired Device

When a paired device is on theinfotainment system and SSP is notsupported:

1. Press {.

2. Touch SETTINGS.




4. Touch the desired device topair. When the Bluetoothdevice and infotainment systemare successfully paired, Z / 5is displayed on the pair devicescreen. If no desired device isavailable go to Step 5.

5. Touch Search Device to searchfor the desired device.


7. Input the PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)code (default: 1234) to theBluetooth device. When theBluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, Z / 5 isdisplayed on the pair devicescreen.

. The connected phone ishighlighted by 5.

. Z / 5 indicates the hands-freeand phone music functions areenabled.

. 5 indicates only the hands-freefunction is enabled.

. Z indicates only Bluetoothmusic is enabled.

Connecting a Paired BluetoothDevice

1. Press {.

2. Touch SETTINGS.


4. Touch the device to beconnected.

Checking the BluetoothConnection

1. Press {.

2. Touch SETTINGS.


4. The paired device will show.

Disconnecting a Bluetooth Device

1. Press {.

2. Touch SETTINGS.


4. Touch the name of the deviceto be disconnected.

5. Touch Disconnect.

Deleting a Bluetooth Device

1. Press {.

2. Touch SETTINGS.


4. Touch the device to delete.

5. Touch Y.

6. Touch Delete.

Bluetooth Music

Before playing Bluetooth music,read the following information:

. A cell phone or Bluetooth devicethat supports Advanced AudioDistribution Profile (A2DP)



versions over 1.2 must beregistered and connected to theproduct.

. From the cell phone or Bluetoothdevice, find the Bluetooth devicetype to set/connect the item as astereo headset.

. e will appear on the screen ifthe stereo headset issuccessfully connected.

. The sound played by theBluetooth device is deliveredthrough the infotainment system.

. Bluetooth music can be playedonly when a Bluetooth devicehas been connected. To playBluetooth music, connect theBluetooth phone to theinfotainment system.

. If the Bluetooth device isdisconnected while playingphone music, the music isdiscontinued. The audiostreaming function may not besupported in some Bluetoothphones. Only one function canbe used at a time between theBluetooth hands-free or Phone

music function. For example,if you convert to Bluetoothhands-free while playing Phonemusic, the music isdiscontinued. Playing music fromthe car is not possible whenthere are no music files stored inthe cell phone.

Playing Bluetooth Music

1. Press {.

2. Touch AUDIO.

3. Touch Source.

4. Touch Bluetooth.

Pause

Touch j to pause.

Touch r to resume.

Playing the Next Song

Touchl.

Playing the Previous Song

Touchg within two seconds ofplayback time to play theprevious song.

Returning to the Beginning of theCurrent Song

Touchg after two seconds ofplayback time.

Search

Touch and holdg orl to rewindor fast forward.

Playing Music Randomly

Touch Z during playback. Touchagain to return to normal play.

This function may not be supporteddepending on the Bluetooth device.

Do not change the track too quicklywhen playing Bluetooth music.

Conditions that may occur whenplaying Bluetooth music:

. It takes time to transmit datafrom the Bluetooth device to theinfotainment system.

. If the cell phone or Bluetoothdevice is not in the waitingscreen mode, it may notautomatically play.


Infotainment System 193. The infotainment system

transmits the order to play fromthe Bluetooth device in theBluetooth music play mode.If this is done in a differentmode, then the device transmitsthe order to stop. Depending onthe Bluetooth device options,this order to play/stop may taketime to activate.

. If the Bluetooth music playbackis not functioning, then check tosee if the Bluetooth device is inthe waiting screen mode.

. Sounds may be cut off duringthe Bluetooth music playback.

. The infotainment system outputsthe audio from the cell phone orBluetooth device as it istransmitted.

Apple CarPlay andAndroid AutoIf equipped, Android Auto and/orApple CarPlay capability may beavailable through a compatiblesmartphone. If available,

PROJECTION will appear on theHome Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

To use Android Auto or AppleCarPlay:

1. Download the Android Autoapp to your phone from theGoogle Play store. No app isrequired for Apple CarPlay.

2. Connect an Android phone oriPhone by using the compatiblephone USB cable and plugginginto a USB data port. For bestperformance, use the device’sfactory-provided USB cable.Aftermarket or third-partycables may not work.

3. When the phone is firstconnected to activate AppleCarPlay or Android Auto, themessage “Device ProjectionPrivacy Consent” will appear.

. Select Continue to launchApple CarPlay orAndroid Auto.

. Select Disable to removeApple CarPlay and AndroidAuto capability from thevehicle Settings menu.Other functions maystill work.

PROJECTION on the Home Pagewill change to Android Auto or AppleCarPlay depending on the phone.Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlaymay automatically launch upon USBconnection. If not, touch theANDROID AUTO and/or APPLECARPLAY icon on the Home Pageto launch.

Press { on the center stack toreturn to the Home Page.

For further information on how to setup Android Auto and Apple CarPlayin the vehicle, see my.gmc.com orsee Customer Assistance Offices0 392.

Android Auto is provided by Googleand is subject to Google’s termsand privacy policy. Apple CarPlay isprovided by Apple and is subject toApple’s terms and privacy policy.Data plan rates apply. For Android



Auto support see https://support.google.com/androidauto.For Apple CarPlay support seewww.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Appleor Google may change or suspendavailability at any time. AndroidAuto, Android, Google, Google Play,and other marks are trademarks ofGoogle Inc.; Apple CarPlay is atrademark of Apple Inc.

Hands-Free Phone

General Information

Vehicles with a Hands-Free Phonesystem can use a Bluetooth-capablecell phone with a hands-free profileto make and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicecontrol are used to operate thesystem. Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Hands-Free Phone system.

Hands-Free Phone Controls

Use the buttons on the infotainmentsystem and the steering wheel tooperate the Hands-Free Phonesystem.


Steering wheel controls can beused to:

. Answer incoming calls.

. Confirm system information.

. End a call.

. Decline a call.

. Cancel an operation.

. Make outgoing calls using thecall list.

g : Press to answer incoming calls.

i : Press to end a call, decline acall, or cancel an operation.

Making a Call by Entering a PhoneNumber

. Press {, then touch PHONE onthe screen.

. Press g on the steering wheel.

If a wrong number is entered, touch} to delete the number one digit ata time, or touch and hold } todelete all digits of the number.

Switching a Call to the Cell Phone(Private Mode)

To switch the call from the cellphone to hands-free:

1. Touch0.

2. Touch0 again to switch backto hands-free.

Turning the Microphone Onand Off

Touch3 to turn the microphone onor off.

Calling by Redial

To call by using redial:

. Pressi on the steering wheelcontrols to display the redialguidance screen.

. Touch 5 on the screen.

Redialing is not possible when thereis no call history.



Taking Calls

When a phone call comes throughthe connected Bluetooth cell phone,the audio system will be muted orpaused and the phone will ring withthe relevant information displayed.

Pressi on the steering wheel

controls, or touch 5 on the screen.

To decline the call, pressi on thesteering wheel controls or touchReject on the screen.

Using the Contacts Menu

1. Touch contacts on the phonescreen.

2. Touch Q or R to scroll throughthe list.

3. Touch the phone book entryto call.

4. If there is more than onenumber associated with thename, touch the numberto dial.

Searching for Contacts Entries

1. Touch contacts on the phonescreen.

2. Touch 9 on the contactsscreen.

3. Use the keypad to input thename to search. For details,see “Searching for a Name”following.

4. Touch the phone book entryto call.

5. If there is more than onenumber associated with thename, touch the numberto dial.

When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, the phone bookwill download. Some phones maynot download automatically. If thishappens, connect it again orproceed with the phone bookdownload on the phone.

Searching for a Name

Select characters by using thekeypad on the phone book screen.As characters are selected, thenames that include those characterswill display on the phone bookscreen. As more characters of thename are entered, the list ofpossible names is shortened.

To search for the name Alex:

1. Touch (abc) to select the firstcharacter.

2. Touch (jkl) three times to selectthe second character.

3. Touch (def) two times to selectthe third character.

4. Touch (wxy) two times to selectthe fourth character.

Making a Call from Call History

1. Touch Call History on thephone screen.

2. Touch one of the following for:

. W All calls history.

. [ Dialed calls.



. Y Missed calls.

. X Received calls.

3. Select the contact entry to call.

Making a Call with Speed DialNumbers

Touch and hold the speed dialnumber using the keypad on thephone screen.

Only speed dial numbers alreadystored on the cell phone can beused for speed dial calls. Up totwo-digit speed dial numbers aresupported.

For two-digit speed dial numbers,touch and hold the second digit tomake a call to the speed dialnumber.

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement0 400.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

“Made for iPod” and “Made foriPhone” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod oriPhone and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks ofApple Computer, Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com orwww.siriusxm.ca. SiriusXM serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada.

In Canada: Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of SiriusXM SatelliteRadio.



It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the SiriusXMSatellite Radio System or thatsupport the SiriusXM website, theOnline Service or any of its content.Furthermore, the AMBER voicecompression software included inthis product is protected byintellectual property rights includingpatent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement fromSiriusXM is required for anyproduct that incorporatesSiriusXM Technology and/or foruse of any of the SiriusXMmarks to be manufactured,distributed, or marketed in theSiriusXM Service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed, and/or sold inCanada, a separate agreement

is required with CanadianSatellite Radio Inc. (operatingas SiriusXM Canada).

FreeType 2

Portions of this software arecopyright 2007-2012 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rightsreserved.

Libjpeg

The navigation software is based inpart on the work of the independentJPEG Group.


198 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate

Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Rear Climate Control

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

MaintenancePassenger Compartment Air

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemWith this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can becontrolled.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. Power Button

10. Air Recirculation



Climate Controls 199

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe following four functions to heator cool the vehicle to the desiredtemperature:

. Fan Speed

. Air Delivery Mode

. Air Conditioning

. Recirculation

When the AUTO indicator light is lit,all four functions are operatingautomatically. Each function can bemanually set and the selectedsetting will be shown. This cancelsfull automatic operation and theAUTO indicator light turns off.Functions that are not manually setwill continue to be automaticallycontrolled, although the AUTOindicator light will not be lit.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting,start with 22 °C (72 °F) andallow the system time tostabilize. Then adjust thetemperature as needed for bestcomfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun load.See “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

O : Press to turn the climate controlsystem on or off. When the systemis off, outside air will be preventedfrom entering the vehicle. When thesystem is on, a button is pressed,

or knob is turned, the climate controlsystem will turn on and deliverairflow per the current setting.

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Press theknob to turn the fan off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC : Press to link the passengerand rear climate temperaturesettings, if equipped, to the driversetting. The SYNC indicator light willturn on. When the passenger or rearclimate temperature settings areadjusted, the SYNC indicator lightis off.



The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

Air Delivery Mode Control : PressY,\,[ , or- to change thedirection of the airflow. An indicatorlight comes on in the selected modebutton.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel and floor outlets.Some air is directed toward thewindshield and side window outlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets, with some to the windshield,side window outlets, and secondrow floor outlets.

- : This mode clears the windowsof fog or moisture. Air is directed tothe windshield, floor outlets, and

side window vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and the air conditioningcompressor will run, unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing.

0 : Press to clear the windshieldof fog or frost more quickly. Air isdirected to the windshield and theside window vents. The airconditioning compressor also comeson, unless the outside temperatureis below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents 0 203.

A/C : Press to turn the airconditioning system on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the air conditioning is enabled.If the fan is turned off, the airconditioner will not run. The A/Clight will stay on even if the outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

@ : Press to turn on recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated to quickly cool theinside of the vehicle. It can also be

used to help reduce outside air andodors that enter the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is on. Thedefogger turns off if the ignition isturned to off or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.



Heated Mirror : If equipped withheated outside mirrors, the mirrorsheat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror when therear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 49.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with remotestart, the climate control systemmay run when the vehicle is startedremotely. The rear defog may comeon during remote start based oncold ambient conditions. The reardefog indicator light does not comeon during a remote start.

If equipped, the heated seats willturn on if it is cold outside or theventilated seats will turn on if it ishot outside. The heated andventilated seat indicator lights maynot come on during a remote start.If equipped, the heated steeringwheel will come on in a remote startif it is cold outside. The heatedsteering wheel indicator light maynot come on.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of thevehicle, could cause a false readingin the displayed temperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped, the rear climate controlsystem is on the rear of the centerconsole storage. The rear climatesettings can be adjusted with thissystem.



1. Fan Control


3. MODE (Air Delivery ModeControl)

4. TEMP (Temperature Control)

5. Heated Rear Seats (IfEquipped)

Rear Climate Control Display

1. Outside Temperature Display

2. Rear Climate TemperatureControl

3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperatures)

5. REAR O (On/Off)

6. Rear Auto (AutomaticOperation)

7. Rear Control Lockout

8. Air Delivery Mode Control

REAR O : Touch REAR O to turnthe rear climate control on or off.

SYNC : Touch SYNC on the displayto match the rear climate controltemperature to the front climatecontrol driver temperature. TheSYNC button will be lit. Adjust therear climate control temperature tochange the linked temperature. TheSYNC button turns off.

Rear Control Lockout : TouchRear Control Lockout on the displayto lock or unlock control of the rearclimate control system from the frontseat. When locked the rear climatecontrol cannot be adjusted from therear climate controls.

Automatic Operation

AUTO : Touch AUTO or Rear Autoon the display to automaticallycontrol air delivery and fan speed. Ais indicated in the display whenautomatic operation is active. If anyof the climate control settings aremanually adjusted, this cancels fullautomatic operation.



The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the system isin rear independent mode. WhenSYNC is active the display is notshown.

Manual Operation

9 : Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise, or touch and holdthe fan control on the display toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

TEMP : Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise, or touch and holdthe temperature controls on thedisplay to adjust the rear passengertemperature. If SYNC is lit, the rearclimate temperature is linked to thedriver temperature setting.

Y/\/Y or MODE : Touch thedesired mode button on the displayor press MODE on the rear climatecontrols to change the direction ofthe airflow in the rear seating area.Repeatedly touch MODE until thedesired mode appears on thedisplay.

M or L : If equipped, press M or Lto heat the left or right outboardseat. See Heated Rear Seats 0 69.

Air VentsTo adjust the center and side airoutlets on the instrument panel, usethe slider switch in the center of theoutlet to change the direction of theairflow and also to shut off theairflow.

There may be outlets overhead inthe rear passenger area; adjust asneeded.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn intothe vehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. If fogging reoccurs while inY or\ modes with mild temperaturethroughout the vehicle, turn onthe air conditioner to reducewindshield fogging.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe passenger compartment airfilter reduces dust, pollen, and otherairborne irritants from outside airthat is pulled into the vehicle. Thefilter will need to be replacedperiodically. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 375.

Using the climate control systemwithout an air filter installed is notrecommended. Water or otherdebris could enter the system andresult in leaks or noises. Alwaysinstall a new filter when removingthe old filter.

For more information on filterreplacement, see your dealer.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The air

conditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 375.


Driving and Operating 205

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 207Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 208Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 214Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 215Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 217Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 221Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 223Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 227Parking over Things

That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Running the Vehicle While

Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 229Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

BrakesAntilock Brake

System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 234Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 235

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/Electronic

Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 238Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . 239

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . 243

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 251Assistance Systems for

Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 253Assistance Systems for

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Forward Automatic

Braking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Front Pedestrian Braking

(FPB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Side Blind Zone

Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . 264Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . 266

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . 268Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 269Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269


206 Driving and Operating

Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Driving Characteristics and

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 281

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keepyour eyes on the road, keep yourhands on the steering wheel, andfocus your attention on driving.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 71.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.



Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingAll-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout all-wheel drive and vehiclesnot equipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must notbe driven off-road except on a level,solid surface. To contact the tiremanufacturer for more informationabout the original equipment tires,see the warranty manual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear seat belts.



Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutall-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lower airdam. However, driving without theair dam reduces fuel economy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper airflow to theengine. Reattach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far forward and aslow as possible. The

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

heaviest things should beon the floor, forward of therear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roofraise the vehicle's center ofgravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured ifthe vehicle rolls over. Putheavy loads inside thecargo area, not on the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 217.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.


Driving and Operating 211. Do not park over things that

burn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn 0 228.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause a crash. Therecould be a drop-off, embankment,cliff, or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with the transmissionin N (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.



2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot berestarted after stalling, set theparking brake, shift intoP (Park), and turn thevehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut, etc.– and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud – the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive through it slowly. At fasterspeeds, water can get into theengine and cause it to stall. Stallingcan occur if the exhaust pipe isunder water. Do not turn off theignition when driving through water.If the exhaust pipe is under water,the engine will not start. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wet,and it might take longer to stop. SeeDriving on Wet Roads 0 214.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.



After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 375.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 319.

. Turn off cruise control.

. Activate All-Wheel Drive (AWD)mode. See Driver Mode Control0 239.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering assist. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, crash).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 236.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 233.


216 Driving and Operating. Allow greater following distance

and watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

. Select All-Wheel Drive (AWD)Mode for vehicles equipped withAWD. Select Snow/Ice Mode forFWD only vehicles.See Driver Mode Control 0 239and All-Wheel Drive 0 233.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 394. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 228.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 236.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Select All-Wheel Drive (AWD)Mode.See Driver Mode Control 0 239 andAll-Wheel Drive 0 233.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 359.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called the

vehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Example Label

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipment

tires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 319and Tire Pressure 0 326.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to



your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 275 forimportant information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter pillar (B-pillar).

The label may show the size ofthe vehicle's original tires andthe inflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. The label showsthe gross weight capacity of thevehicle. This is called the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label mayalso show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on the front andrear axles, weigh the vehicle ata weigh station. Your dealer canhelp with this. Be sure to spreadthe load equally on both sides ofthe centerline.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unlessneeded.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 800 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 300 km (200 mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.



The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interferenceto the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 29.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be on and the brake pedalmust be applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : Whenthe vehicle is stopped, pressENGINE START/STOP once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 226.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).

When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willturn off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition off.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 234.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for longer than two seconds,or press twice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowssome electrical accessories to beused when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.



ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine 0 223. Theignition will then remain in ON/RUN.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Mode. Theinstruments and audio systems willoperate as they do in ON/RUN, butthe vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Mode. Press the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 283.

Starting Procedure

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. PressENGINE START/STOP with thebrake pedal applied. When theengine begins cranking, let goof the button.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKEbattery is low, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay a message.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou press ENGINE START/STOP, for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the button andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine

and transmission gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Stop/Start SystemIf equipped, the Stop/Start systemwill shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. It has componentsdesigned for the increased numberof starts.

{ Warning

The automatic engine Stop/Startfeature causes the engine to shutoff while the vehicle is still on. Donot exit the vehicle before shiftingto P (Park). The vehicle mayrestart and move unexpectedly.Always shift to P (Park), and thenturn the ignition off before exitingthe vehicle.

Auto Engine Stop/Start

When the brakes are applied andthe vehicle is at a complete stop,the engine may turn off. Whenstopped, the tachometer displays

AUTO STOP. See Tachometer0 131. When the brake pedal isreleased or the accelerator pedal ispressed, the engine will restart.

To maintain vehicle performance,other conditions may cause theengine to automatically restartbefore the brake pedal is released.

Auto Stops may not occur and/orauto restarts may occur because:

. The climate control settingsrequire the engine to be runningto cool or heat the vehicleinterior.

. The vehicle battery chargeis low.

. The vehicle battery has recentlybeen disconnected.

. Minimum vehicle speed has notbeen reached since the lastAuto Stop

. The accelerator pedal ispressed.

. The engine or transmission isnot at the required operatingtemperature.


Driving and Operating 225. The outside temperature is not

in the required operating range.

. The vehicle is in any gear otherthan D (Drive).

. Tow/Haul Mode or other drivermodes have been selected.

. The vehicle is on a steep hill orgrade.

. The driver door has beenopened or driver seat belt hasbeen unbuckled.

. The hood has been opened.

. The Auto Stop has reached themaximum allowed time.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at or below0 °F (−18 °C). Vehicles with anengine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.Some models may have an internalthermostat in the cord which willprevent engine heater operation attemperatures above 0 °F (−18 °C).

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parkedin a garage or under a carport.Property damage or personalinjury may result. Always park thevehicle in a clear open area awayfrom buildings or structures.

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The bundledcord is on the driver side of theengine compartment, in front ofthe battery. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 288.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detection

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)Some vehicle accessories may beused after the ignition is turned off.

The power windows and sunroof,if equipped, will continue to work forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

The infotainment system willcontinue to work for 10 minutes,until the driver door is opened,or until the ignition is turned on orplaced in ACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 234.

2. Move the shift lever intoP (Park) by holding in thebutton on the shift lever andpushing the shift lever all theway toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Turn the ignition off.



Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 226.If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 271.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpressing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed toprevent movement of the shift leverout of P (Park), unless the ignition ison or in ACC/ACCESSORY, and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 356 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Apply the brake pedal.

3. Press the shift lever button.



4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 226 andEngine Exhaust 0 228.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitteroutside the vehicle, it will continueto run for up to half an hour.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to an hour.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 226 andEngine Exhaust 0 228.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 271.

AutomaticTransmission

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when startingthe engine because the vehiclecannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 226 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 271.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. With the ignition on fullyapply the regular brake, then pressthe button on the back of the shiftlever before shifting from P (Park).If you cannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever,then push the shift lever all the wayinto P (Park) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift

lever button and move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting outof Park 0 227.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 217.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.



Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normaldriving. If more power is needed forpassing, press the acceleratorpedal down.

Caution

If the vehicle does not shift gears,the transmission could bedamaged. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,with your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll. This is normaland is due to the torque converter

designed to improve fuel economyand performance. Use the brake tohold the vehicle on a hill. Do not usethe accelerator pedal.

L : This position gives you accessto gear ranges. This provides moreengine braking but lower fueleconomy than D (Drive). You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. See Manual Mode0 231.

Operating Modes : Thetransmission may operate in a lowergear than normal to improve vehicleperformance. The engine speedmay be higher and there may be anincrease in noise during thefollowing conditions:

. When climbing a grade.

. When driving downhill.

. When driving in hottemperatures, or at high altitude.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. When using theERS mode a number will displaynext to the L, indicating the highestgear available for the rangeselected.



To use this feature:

1. Press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).

2. Press + (Plus) or − (Minus) onthe shift lever to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode), the transmissionwill shift to a pre-determined lowergear range. The highest gearavailable for this pre-determinedrange is displayed next to the L inthe DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base and Midlevel) 0 145 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Uplevel)0 148. The number displayed in theDIC is the highest gear that thetransmission will be allowed tooperate in. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.

The transmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

If the transmission is in 6 (Sixth)gear when L (Manual Mode) isselected, a downshift to 4 (Fourth)will be commanded. If in 5 (Fifth)through 2 (Second) a singledownshift will occur.

While in L (Manual Mode), thetransmission will prevent shifting toa lower gear range if the enginespeed is too high. You have a briefperiod of time to slow the vehicle.If vehicle speed is not reducedwithin the time allowed, the lowergear range shift will not becompleted. You must further slowthe vehicle, then press − (Minus) tothe desired lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade Braking isnot available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) forboth normal driving and Tow/HaulMode. While using the ERS, cruisecontrol and the Tow/Haul Mode canbe used. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 232.

Tow/Haul ModeSee Driver Mode Control 0 239.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature canoperate in AWD Mode. See DriverMode Control 0 239.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemay be heard while this test is goingon, and it may even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 139.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The EPB can alwaysbe activated, even if the ignition isoff. To prevent draining the battery,avoid repeated cycles of the EPBsystem when the engine is notrunning.

The system has aY or PARK

Electric Parking Brake light, and a 8Service Parking Brake light ormessage.See Electric Parking Brake Light0 139 and Service Electric ParkingBrake Light (Uplevel and MidlevelCluster Only) 0 139.

Before leaving the vehicle, check fortheY or PARK light to ensure thatthe parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

TheY or PARK light will flash andthen stay on once the EPB is fullyapplied. If theY or PARK lightflashes continuously, then the EPBis only partially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DICmessage will display. Release theEPB and try to apply it again. If thelight does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if theY orPARK light is flashing. See yourdealer. See Electric Parking BrakeLight 0 139.

If the 8 light or message is on,press the EPB switch and hold it.Continue to hold the switch untiltheY or PARK light remains on.

If the 8 light or message remainson, see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch ispressed. If the switch is presseduntil the vehicle comes to a stop,the EPB will remain applied.



The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations whenthe vehicle is not moving. This isnormal, and is done to periodicallycheck the correct operation of theEPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, block therear wheels to prevent vehiclemovement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:


2. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

3. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

The EPB is released when theYor PARK light is off.

If the 8 light or message is on,release the EPB by pressing andholding the EPB switch. Continue tohold the switch until theY or

PARK light is off. If either light stayson after release is attempted, seeyour dealer.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses the

stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Hill Start Assist (HSA) will activatewhen the vehicle is stopped on amoderate to steep grade to helpprevent it from rolling in anunintended direction. After the brakepedal has been released and before



the accelerator pedal has beenpressed, HSA uses brakingpressure to hold the vehiclestationary. If HSA is holding thevehicle, a DIC message displays.HSA will not activate in a forwarddrive gear when facing downhill,or in R (Reverse) when facing uphill.

Select the duration of the HSAfeature through vehiclepersonalization. See ”Extended HillStart Assist” under “Comfort andConvenience” in VehiclePersonalization 0 152. WhenStandard Hold is selected, thevehicle is held stationary for up totwo seconds after the brake pedal isreleased. When Extended Hold isselected, the vehicle is heldstationary for up to five minutesafter the brake pedal is released. Ineither case, override the holdfeature by pressing the acceleratorpedal and attempting to drive away.

If Standard Hold is selected, it willhold the vehicle for two secondsunless the driver door is opened orthe driver seat belt is unbuckledafter releasing the brake pedal.If Extended Hold is selected, it willhold the vehicle for five minutesunless the driver door is openedand the driver seat belt is unbuckledprior to releasing the brake pedal.When deactivated after five minutes,or if it is deactivated when the driverseat belt is unlatched or the driverdoor is opened, the Electric ParkingBrake will engage to prevent vehiclemovement.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC),an electronic stability controlsystem. These systems help limitwheel spin and assist the driver inmaintaining control, especially onslippery road conditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak/ESC activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak/ESC selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the



vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andTCS or StabiliTrak/ESC begins tolimit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow. TCS andStabiliTrak/ESC will automaticallyturn on when cruise control is set.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 217and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin

. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC isactivated

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message may display inthe Driver Information Center (DIC),and d comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

4. Drive the vehicle.

If d comes on and stays on, thevehicle may need more time todiagnose the problem. If thecondition persists, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On



Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The Traction Off light idisplays in the instrument clusterand a DIC message may display.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease g. The Traction Off light idisplayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turnoff until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until the

Traction Off light i and StabiliTrak/

ESC OFF light g come on and stayon in the instrument cluster. A DICmessage may display.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC onagain, press and release g. The

Traction Off light i and StabiliTrak/

ESC OFF light g in the instrumentcluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 286.

Hill DescentControl (HDC)If equipped, HDC can be used whendriving downhill. It sets andmaintains vehicle speed whiledescending a very steep incline in aforward or reverse gear.

The HDC switch is on the centerconsole, behind the transmissionshift lever.

Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.Vehicle speed must be below50 km/h (31 mph).

A blinking HDC light indicates thesystem is actively applying thebrakes to maintain vehicle speed.

HDC can maintain vehicle speedsbetween 3 and 22 km/h (2 and14 mph) on an incline greater thanor equal to a 10% grade.

When HDC is activated, the initialHDC speed is set to the currentdriving speed. It can be increased ordecreased by pressing the RES+ orSET– steering wheel controls or byapplying the accelerator or brakepedal. This adjusted speedbecomes the new set speed.

HDC will remain enabled between22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph);however vehicle speed cannot beset or maintained in this range.It will automatically disable if thevehicle speed is above 80 km/h



(50 mph) or above 60 km/h(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds.Press 5 again to re-enable HDC.

Driver Mode ControlIf equipped, the Driver Mode Controlhas the following Modes: Tour(FWD), Sport, All-Wheel Drive(AWD), Snow/Ice, Tow/Haul, andOff-Road. Rotate the Driver ModeControl knob on the center consoleto make a mode selection. Continueturning the knob through theavailable modes. The selectedmode’s icon will light up onthe knob.

If the vehicle is in Tour (FWD) orAWD, it will stay in that modethrough future ignition cycles. If thevehicle is in any other mode, it willrevert back to Tour (FWD) when thevehicle is restarted.

Driver Mode Control Knob

5 orq Tour (FWD) : Vehicle isin Tour (FWD) Mode. Use this modeduring normal driving conditions.See Driving for Better FuelEconomy 0 26. Tour (FWD) Modeoperates in Front-Wheel Drive toimprove fuel economy.

8 Sport : Sport Mode improvesvehicle handling and accelerationon dry pavement. When active,Sport Mode modifies steeringefforts, transmission shifting, AWDtorque, and suspension tuning(when properly equipped). For AWDvehicles, choosing Sport Mode alsoengages AWD Mode.

4 AWD (AWD Only) : AWD Modeprovides drive torque to all fourwheels. Select AWD to improvetraction and control on slippery roadsurfaces, such as gravel, sand, wetpavement, snow, and ice. When inAWD Mode, the AWD Modeindicator will be on. The AWD Modewill stay selected until the mode ischanged.

AWD is active in AWD, Sport, Tow/Haul, and Off-Road Modes.

Sport, Tow/Haul, and Off-RoadModes are cancelled with eachignition cycle and will return to Tour(FWD) Mode.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and reduces AWDperformance to protect the system.To restore full AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on thesystem, replace the compact sparewith a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tire0 355.



6 Snow/Ice (FWD Only) : Snow/Ice Mode improves vehicleacceleration on snow and icecovered roads.

_ Tow/Haul : This feature canassist when towing or hauling aheavy load. Use this mode to assistin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission. For AWD vehicles,choosing Tow/Haul Mode alsoengages AWD mode. See DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 271.

Automatic Engine Grade Braking

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving downhill.It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftpattern that uses the engine and thetransmission to slow the vehicle.The system will automaticallycommand downshifts to reducevehicle speed. The normal shiftpattern will return once the vehicleis on a low grade or when theaccelerator pedal is pressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driver toselect a range and limiting thehighest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul Mode.

See Automatic Transmission 0 229.

7 Off-Road (AWD Only) : Usethis mode for off-road recreationaldriving. Choosing Off-Road Modealso engages AWD Mode. For moreinformation on Off-Road Mode, seeOff-Road Driving 0 209.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system begins to limitwheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise control



automatically disengages. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 236. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 257. Whenroad conditions allow the cruisecontrol to be safely used, cruisecontrol can be turned back on.

Turning off the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC system will disengage thecruise control.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J : Press to turn the system onand off. A white indicator appears inthe instrument cluster when cruiseis turned on.

RES+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If the cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

IfJ is on when not in use, SET− orRES+ could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. KeepJoff when cruise is not being used.

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−. Thedesired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed, a greencruise control indicator appears onthe instrument cluster.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press RES+ briefly. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.



Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold RES+ up untilthe desired speed is reached,then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressRES+. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 127.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET− until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressSET−. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying SET− will result in cruise set to thecurrent vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,

you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. While on a hill, thetransmission may downshift in orderto use engine braking to slow thevehicle and maintain the set speed.Also, you may have to brake or shiftto a lower gear to keep your speeddown. If the brake pedal is applied,cruise control disengages.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifJ ispressed or if the ignition isturned off.



Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows the driver toselect the cruise control set speedand following gap. Read this entiresection before using this system.The following gap is the followingtime between your vehicle and avehicle detected directly ahead inyour path, moving in the samedirection. If no vehicle is detected inyour path, ACC works like regularcruise control. ACC uses cameraand radar sensors. See RadioFrequency Statement 0 400.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can apply acceleration orlimited, moderate braking tomaintain the selected following gap.To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If ACC is controlling your vehiclespeed when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system activates, the ACC mayautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 236. When road

conditions allow ACC to be safelyused, the ACC can be turnedback on.

Turning off the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC system will disengage thecruise control.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoida collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, or enter your lane.Also see “Alerting the Driver” inthis section. Complete attention isalways required while driving andyou should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 207.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roadsor when the sensors areblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.The system may not detecta vehicle ahead. Keep theentire front of the vehicleclean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snowconditions. ACCperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads wherefast changes in tire tractioncan cause excessivewheel slip.



J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

RES+ : Press briefly to resume theprevious set speed or to increasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyactivated. To increase speed by1 km/h (1 mph), press RES+ to thefirst detent. To increase speed to thenext 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer, press RES+ to thesecond detent.

SET– : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate ACC or todecrease vehicle speed if ACC is

already activated. To decreasespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET− to the first detent. To decreasespeed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph)mark on the speedometer, pressSET− to the second detent.

* : Press to disengage ACCwithout erasing the selected setspeed.

[ : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.

Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

To switch between ACC and regularcruise control, press and hold*.A Driver Information Display (DIC)message displays. See VehicleMessages 0 151.

ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a green ]indicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster. When the regular cruisecontrol is engaged, a greenJindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set tothe last mode used before thevehicle was turned off.

{ Warning

Always check the cruise controlindicator on the instrument clusterto determine which mode cruisecontrol is in before using thefeature. If ACC is not active, thevehicle will not automaticallybrake for other vehicles, whichcould cause a crash if the brakesare not applied manually. You andothers could be seriously injuredor killed.



Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

IfJ is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into cruise whennot desired. KeepJ off whencruise is not being used.

Select the set speed desired forcruise. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inits path.

ACC will not set at a speed lessthan 25 km/h (15 mph), although itcan be resumed when driving atlower speeds.

To set ACC:

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET–.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis detected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

ACC can also be set while thevehicle is stopped if ACC is on andthe brake pedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster. When ACC isactive, the indicator will be lit green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If ACC is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, ACC isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, pressRES+ up briefly.

. If the vehicle is moving, it returnsto the previous set speed.

. If the vehicle is stopped with thebrake pedal applied, press RES+ and release the brake pedal.ACC will hold the vehicle untilRES+ or the accelerator pedal ispressed.

A green ACC indicator and the setspeed display on the instrumentcluster. The vehicle ahead indicatormay be flashing if a vehicle aheadwas present and moved. See“Approaching and Following aVehicle” later in this section.

Once ACC has resumed, if there isno vehicle ahead, if the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, or if the vehicle hasexited a sharp curve, then thevehicle speed will increase to theset speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is ata Set Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– .Release the control and the



accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden. TheACC indicator on the instrumentpanel will turn blue. See VehicleMessages 0 151.

. Press and hold RES+ until thedesired set speed appears onthe display, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press RES+ tothe first detent. For each press,the vehicle goes 1 km/h (1 mph)faster.

. To increase vehicle speed inlarger increments, press RES+to the second detent. For eachpress, the vehicle speedincreases to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.

The set speed can also beincreased while the vehicle isstopped.

. If stopped with the brakeapplied, press RES+ until thedesired set speed is displayed.

. If ACC is holding the vehicle at astop and there is another vehicledirectly ahead, pressing RES+will increase the set speed.Pressing RES+ when there is nolonger a vehicle ahead willcause ACC to resume.

When it is determined that there isno vehicle ahead or the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, then the vehiclespeed will increase to the set speed.


Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:

. Use the brake to get to thedesired lower speed. Releasethe brake and press SET– . Thevehicle will now cruise at thelower speed.

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmaller increments, press SET−to the first detent. For eachpress, the vehicle goes about1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

. To decrease the vehicle speed inlarger increments, press SET−to the second detent. For eachpress, the vehicle speeddecreases to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.




Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gapsetting displays briefly on theinstrument cluster. The gap settingwill be maintained until it ischanged.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow a

vehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditions whenselecting the following gap. Therange of selectable gaps may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 257.

Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when ACC cannotapply sufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, six redlights will flash on the windshield.Either eight beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the Safety

Alert Seat will pulse five times. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

See Defensive Driving 0 207.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster.

The vehicle ahead indicator onlydisplays when a vehicle is detectedin your vehicle’s path moving in thesame direction.

If this symbol is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake forvehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected follow gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases to



follow the vehicle in front of you, butwill not exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking, if necessary.When braking is active, the brakelights will come on. The automaticbraking may feel or sound differentthan if the brakes were appliedmanually. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for avehicle it has never detectedmoving. This can occur instop-and-go traffic or when avehicle suddenly appears due toa vehicle ahead changing lanes.Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use cautionwhen using ACC. Your completeattention is always required while

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

driving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand the driver will need to manuallyapply the brakes to slow thevehicle when:

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System(TCS) or StabiliTrak/ESC systemhas activated or been disabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar may falsely report ablockage when driving in adesert or remote area with noother vehicles or roadsideobjects. A DIC message maydisplay to indicate that ACC istemporarily unavailable.

The ACC indicator will turn whitewhen ACC is no longer active.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a follow gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thatvehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle aheadindicator will flash as a reminder tocheck traffic ahead beforeproceeding. In addition, the left andright sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse three times, or threebeeps will sound. See “Alert Type”and “Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

When the vehicle ahead drivesaway, press RES+ or theaccelerator pedal to resume cruisecontrol. If stopped for more thantwo minutes or if the driver door isopened and the driver seat belt isunbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPBstatus light will turn on. See Electric



Parking Brake 0 234. To resumeACC and release the EPB, pressthe accelerator pedal.

A DIC warning message maydisplay indicating to shift to P (Park)before exiting the vehicle. SeeVehicle Messages 0 151.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle,and if ACC is disengaged, turnedoff, or canceled, the vehicle willno longer be held at a stop. Thevehicle can move. When ACC isholding the vehicle at a stop,always be prepared to manuallyapply the brakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle withoutplacing it in P (Park) can bedangerous. Do not leave thevehicle while it is being held at astop by ACC. Always place the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle in P (Park) and turn offthe ignition before leaving thevehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicatorturns blue on the instrument clusterto indicate that automatic brakingwill not occur. See VehicleMessages 0 151. ACC will resumeoperation when the acceleratorpedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exitramps. You could lose control ofthe vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

to use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadindicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does notneed service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills andWhen Towing a Trailer



Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.ACC will not detect a vehicle in thelane while driving on steep hills. Thedriver will often need to take overacceleration and braking on steephills, especially when towing atrailer. If the brakes are applied, theACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifJ ispressed or if the ignition isturned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on thewindshield behind the rearviewmirror and the radar sensors on thefront of the vehicle can becomeblocked by snow, ice, dirt, or mud.These areas need to be cleaned forACC to operate properly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 363.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 207.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as witha sticker, magnet, or metalplate.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 152.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.



. Front and rear bumpers and thearea below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the frontgrille or near the front emblem

. Front side and rear side panels

. Outside of the windshield in frontof the rearview mirrors

. Side camera lens on the bottomof the outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera above thelicense plate

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA),Front Park Assist (FPA), SurroundVision, Front Vision Camera, andRear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) mayhelp the driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehiclewhen parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment display,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of approximately 12 km/h(8 mph). Select Front or RearCamera on the camera screen toview the front or rear camera views.Select Guidance Lines on thecamera screen to enable or disablethe guidance lines.

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper



Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that Rear Park Assist (RPA)has detected an object. This trianglechanges from amber to red andincreases in size the closer theobject.

Hitch Guidance

This feature displays a single,centered guideline on the cameradisplay to assist with aligning avehicle’s hitch ball with a trailercoupler. Select the trailer guidanceline button, then align the trailerguidance line over the trailercoupler. Continuously steer thevehicle to keep the guidance linecentered on the coupler whenbacking. RVC Park Assist overlayswill not display when the trailerguidance line is active.

To check the trailer when in aforward gear above approximately12 km/h (8 mph), touch CAMERAon the infotainment display to viewthe rear camera. Touch X to exit theview or it will be removedautomatically after eight seconds.

{ Warning

Use Hitch Guidance only to helpback the vehicle to a trailer hitchor, when travelling above 8 km/h(5 mph), to briefly check thestatus of your trailer. Do not usefor any other purpose, such asmaking lane change decisions.Before making a lane change,always check the mirrors andglance over your shoulder.Improper use could result inserious injury to you or others.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Visiondisplays an image of the areasurrounding the vehicle, along withthe front or rear camera views in the

infotainment display. The frontcamera is in the grille or near thefront emblem, the side cameras areon the bottom of the outsiderearview mirrors, and the rearcamera is above the license plate.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision camerashave blind spots and will notdisplay all objects near thecorners of the vehicle. Foldingoutside mirrors that are out ofposition may not display surroundview correctly. Always checkaround the vehicle when parkingor backing.



1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area infront of the vehicle displays. Theview displays after shifting fromR (Reverse) to a forward gear, or bytouching CAMERA in theinfotainment display, and when thevehicle is moving forward slowerthan 8 km/h (5 mph). If equipped,the Front Vision Camera alsodisplays when the Park Assistsystem detects an object within30 cm (12 in).

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Park Assist

With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,as the vehicle moves at speeds ofless than 8 km/h (5 mph) thesensors on the bumpers may detectobjects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind thevehicle and 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of thevehicle within a zone 25 cm (10 in)high off the ground and belowbumper level. These detectiondistances may be shorter during



warmer or humid weather. Blockedsensors will not detect objects andcan also cause false detections.Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt,snow, ice, and slush; and cleansensors after a car wash in freezingtemperatures.

{ Warning

The Park Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withPark Assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have apark assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the ParkAssist system. As the object getscloser, more bars light up and thebars change color from yellow toamber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),five beeps will sound from the frontor rear depending on objectlocation, or both sides of the Safety

Alert Seat will pulse five times.Beeps for FPA are higher pitchedthan for RPA.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAdisplays a red warning triangle witha left or right pointing arrow on theinfotainment display to warn oftraffic coming from the left or right.This system detects objects comingfrom up to 20 m (65 ft) from the leftor right side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either threebeeps sound from the left or right orthree Safety Alert Seat pulses occuron the left or right side, dependingon the direction of the detectedvehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.



Turning the Features On or Off

PressX on the center console toturn on or off the Front and RearPark Assist and the Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA). The indicatorlight in the button comes on whenthe features are on and turns offwhen the features have beendisabled.

Turn off park assist and RCTA whentowing a trailer.

To turn off the RPA symbols orguidance lines (on some models)see “Rear Camera” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

RCTA can be turned off through“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle in a forward gear, ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), LaneKeep Assist (LKA), Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert

(LCA), Forward Automatic Braking(FAB), and/or the Front PedestrianBraking (FPB) System can help toavoid a crash or reduce crashdamage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 8 km/h (5 mph). If the vehiclehas Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),it can detect vehicles to distances ofapproximately 110 m (360 ft) andoperates at all speeds. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 243.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails,bridges, construction barrels,or other objects. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 207.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.

When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.



Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near,or on some vehicles, Off. The firstbutton press shows the currentsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged and will affect the timing ofboth the Collision Alert and theTailgating Alert features. The timingof both alerts will vary based onvehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away thealert will occur. Consider traffic and

weather conditions when selectingthe alert timing. The range ofselectable alert timings may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the followinggap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).

Following Distance Indicator

The following distance to a movingvehicle ahead in your path isindicated in following time inseconds on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base and Midlevel) 0 145 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Uplevel)0 148. The minimum following timeis 0.5 seconds away. If there is novehicle detected ahead, or thevehicle ahead is out of sensorrange, dashes will be displayed.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correctthe issue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of therearview mirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.

. Clean the headlamps.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the same



direction that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This forward automaticbraking can only occur if a vehicle isdetected. This is shown by the FCAvehicle ahead indicator being lit.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 257.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph),or on vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), above 4 km/h(2 mph). It can detect vehicles up toapproximately 60 m (197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on FAB to brake the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. FAB will not brakeoutside of its operating speedrange and only responds todetected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles,especially vehicles with atrailer, tractors, muddyvehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if itis partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, FABmay engage the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at astop. Release the EPB or firmlypress the accelerator pedal.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.



Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengageonly when the brake pedal isreleased.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

The FAB system does not needservice.

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) SystemIf equipped, the FPB system mayhelp avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes withnearby pedestrians when driving ina forward gear. FPB displays anamber indicator, ~, when a nearby

pedestrian is detected directlyahead. When approaching adetected pedestrian too quickly,FPB provides a red flashing alert onthe windshield and rapidly beeps orpulses the driver seat. FPB canprovide a boost to braking orautomatically brake the vehicle. Thissystem includes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA), and the ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) systemmay also respond to pedestrians.See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 259.

The FPB system can detect andalert to pedestrians in a forwardgear at speeds between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph).During daytime driving, the systemdetects pedestrians up to a distanceof approximately 40 m (131 ft).During nighttime driving, systemperformance is very limited.



{ Warning

FPB does not provide an alert orautomatically brake the vehicle,unless it detects a pedestrian.FPB may not detect pedestrians,including children:

. When the pedestrian is notdirectly ahead, fully visible,or standing upright, or whenpart of a group.

. Due to poor visibility,including nighttimeconditions, fog, rain,or snow.

. If the FPB sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice.

. If the headlamps orwindshield are not cleanedor in proper condition.

Be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving 0 207.Keep the windshield, headlamps,and FPB sensor clean and ingood repair.

FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alertand Brake through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 152.

Detecting the PedestrianAhead

FPB alerts and automatic brakingwill not occur unless the FPBsystem detects a pedestrian. Whena nearby pedestrian is detecteddirectly in front of the vehicle, thepedestrian ahead indicator willdisplay amber.

Front Pedestrian Alert

When the vehicle approaches apedestrian ahead too rapidly, thered FPB alert display will flash onthe windshield. Eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Pedestrian Alert occurs,the brake system may prepare fordriver braking to occur more rapidlywhich can cause a brief, milddeceleration. Continue to apply thebrake pedal as needed. Cruisecontrol may be disengaged whenthe Front Pedestrian Alert occurs.

Automatic Braking

If FPB detects it is about to crashinto a pedestrian directly ahead, andthe brakes have not been applied,FPB may automatically brake



moderately or brake hard. This canhelp to avoid some very low speedpedestrian crashes or reducepedestrian injury. FPB canautomatically brake to detectedpedestrians between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph). Automaticbraking levels may be reducedunder certain conditions, such ashigher speeds.

If this happens, Automatic Brakingmay engage the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at astop. Release the EPB. A firm pressof the accelerator pedal will alsorelease Automatic Braking andthe EPB.

{ Warning

FPB may alert or automaticallybrake the vehicle suddenly insituations where it is unexpectedand undesired. It could falselyalert or brake for objects similar inshape or size to pedestrians,including shadows. This is normal

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

operation and the vehicle doesnot need service. To overrideAutomatic Braking, firmly pressthe accelerator pedal, if it is safeto do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.

{ Warning

Using the Front PedestrianBraking system while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert or Offwhen towing a trailer.

Cleaning the System

If FPB does not seem to operateproperly, cleaning the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror may correct the issue.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas.When the vehicle is in a forwardgear, the left or right side mirrordisplay will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Change Alert (LCA)system, read the entire LCA sectionbefore using this feature.



Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside side mirror and will flash ifthe turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changinglanes under all driving conditions.Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Before making a lane change,always check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)warning area starts at approximatelythe middle of the vehicle and goesback 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are alsowarned of vehicles rapidlyapproaching from up to 70 m (230 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thatzone from behind. A lit LCA symbolindicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the LCA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthe next lane over in that blind zone



or rapidly approaching that zone.If the turn signal is activated in thesame direction as a detectedvehicle, this display will flash as anextra warning not to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization using theSide Blind Zone Alert option. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 152.If LCA is disabled by the driver, theLCA mirror displays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires somedriving for the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic androadside objects (e.g., guardrails,barriers).

LCA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further back

when a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle.Attached objects may also interferewith the detection of vehicles. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not always alert the driverto vehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due toguardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, andother non-moving objects. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 363.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaning

both sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in theside blind zone or are rapidlyapproaching this zone and thesystem is clean, the system mayneed service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

When LCA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

Radio Frequency Information


Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing adetected lane marking without usinga turn signal in the lane departure



direction. Since this system is partof the Lane Keep Assist (LKA)system, read the entire LKA sectionbefore using this feature.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if alane marking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid alane departure or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice, if they arenot in proper condition, or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it willonly assist or provide an LDWalert when approaching the laneon the side where it has detecteda lane marking. Even with LKAand LDW, you must steer thevehicle. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA inbad weather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a traileror on slippery roads could causeloss of control of the vehicle anda crash. Turn the system off.



How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center console.

When on,A is green if LKA isavailable to assist and provide LDWalerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel anddisplayA as amber if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using a turn signal in thatdirection. It may also provide anLDW alert by flashingA amberas the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.If LKA does not detect active driversteering, an alert, chime, or DICmessage may be provided. Movethe steering wheel to dismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.The LKA system does not needservice.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.



Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline to keepthe engine clean, reduce enginedeposits, and maintain optimalvehicle performance. Look for theTOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended FuelDo not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with aposted octane rating of less than 87,as this may cause engine knock andwill lower fuel economy.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing somay damage the vehicle and voidits warranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeledgreater than 15% ethanol by

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

volume, such as mid-levelethanol blends (16–50%ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal,ferrocene, and aniline.These fuels can corrodemetal fuel system parts ordamage plastic and rubberparts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions controlsystem and spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Usingthis fuel will lower fueleconomy and performance,and may decrease the life ofthe emissions catalyst.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knockindex (AKI). For fuel not to use in aforeign country, see ProhibitedFuels 0 268.

Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline ishighly recommended for use withyour vehicle. If your country doesnot have TOP TIER DetergentGasoline, add ACDelco FuelSystem Treatment Plus−Gasoline tothe vehicle’s gasoline fuel tank atevery oil change or 15,000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline andACDelco Fuel System TreatmentPlus−Gasoline will help keep yourvehicle’s engine fuel deposit freeand performing optimally.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronicdevices while refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait forany hiss noise to stop priorto beginning to flow fuel.

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door.



The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuelcap. The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 363.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank with a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portablegas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from the rear cargoarea under the load floor.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause afire and you or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return it to thestorage location.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burned

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside ofthe fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle.Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using electronicdevices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle to tow a trailer. Read theentire section before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 359. To towthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 359.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ Warning

You can lose control when towinga trailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is notdriven properly. For example,if the trailer is too heavy or the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

trailer brakes are inadequate forthe load, the vehicle may not stopas expected. You and otherscould be seriously injured. Thevehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these are



important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with and followall state and local laws thatapply to trailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. State laws may require the useof extended side view mirrors.Even if not required, you shouldinstall extended side viewmirrors if your visibility is limitedor restricted while towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) of vehicleuse to prevent damage to theengine, axle, or other parts.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)of trailer towing, do not driveover 80 km/h (50 mph) and donot make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Tow/Haul Mode is recommendedfor heavier trailers. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 232. If the

transmission downshifts toooften, a lower gear may beselected using Manual Mode.See Manual Mode 0 231.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned off when towing a trailer:

. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Super Cruise Control

. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

. Park Assist

. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

. Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned to alert or off when towing atrailer:

. Forward Automatic BrakingSystem (FAB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of the

vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones thatextend out from the back of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed.

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or deathfrom carbon monoxide (CO),when towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 228.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle itself. Getused to the handling and braking ofthe combination by driving on alevel road surface before driving onpublic roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, andthe brakes must be all be rated tocarry the intended cargo.Inadequate trailer equipment cancause the combination to operate inan unexpected or unsafe manner.Before driving, inspect all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,

tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 278. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and thenmanually apply the trailer brakecontroller to check the trailer brakeswork. During the trip, occasionallycheck that the cargo and trailer aresecure and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement causedby the trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This canhelp to avoid heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination of the vehicle andtrailer will not accelerate as quicklyand is much longer than the vehiclealone. It is necessary to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane. Passon level roadways. Avoid passingon hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move that hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Caution

Turn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so the trailer will not go oversoft shoulders, over curbs, or strikeroad signs, trees, or other objects.Always signal turns well in advance.Do not steer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downhill grade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes may overheat and result inreduced braking efficiency.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle could show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run, preferably onlevel ground, with the transmissionin P (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 300.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle andtrailer on a level surface whenpossible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, gradually release thebrake pedal to allow the chocksto absorb the load of the trailer.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal:

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.



3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 375. It isespecially important to check theautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system beforeand during each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts andbolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 300.

Trailer Towing

Caution

Towing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealerfor important information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailer Weight

{ Warning

Never exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoringthe weight, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature,dimensions of the front of the trailer,and how frequently the vehicle isused to tow a trailer.

Trailering Weight Ratings

When towing a trailer, the weight ofthe loaded vehicle and trailer mustbe within the weight ratings for thevehicle.

. GCWR: Gross Combined WeightRating

. GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating

. Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

. Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating

The only way to be sure the weightis not exceeding any of theseratings is to weigh the tow vehicleand trailer combination, fully loadedfor the trip, getting individualweights for each of these items.

{ Warning

You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. The

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle may be damaged, and therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.

Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR)

GCWR is the total allowable weightof the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any fuel,passengers, cargo, equipment, andaccessories. Do not exceed theGCWR for your vehicle. The GCWRfor the vehicle is on the Tow RatingChart.

Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 217. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached,the trailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight

The maximum trailer weight rating iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas a driver, a front seat passenger,and all required traileringequipment. Weight of additionaloptional equipment, passengers,and cargo in the tow vehicle mustbe subtracted from the trailer weightrating.

Use the tow rating chart todetermine how much the trailer canweigh, based on the vehicle modeland options.



Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

2.5L and 3.6L Engines 454 kg (1,000 lb) 2 722 kg (6,000 lb)

3.6L Engine With V92 Trailer Towing Package 1 814 kg (4,000 lb) 4 075 kg (8,984 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating

The Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating is the allowabletrailer tongue weight that the vehiclecan support.

Vehicle Series MaximumTongue Weight

2.5L FWD/AWD 45.4 kg (100 lbs)

3.6L FWD/AWD 45.4 kg (100 lbs)

3.6L FWD/AWDV92 heavy dutytowing

181.1 kg(400 lbs)

The trailer tongue weight contributesto the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).GVW includes the CURB WEIGHT

of your vehicle, any passengers,cargo, equipment and the trailertongue weight. Vehicle options,passengers, cargo, and equipmentreduce the maximum allowabletongue weight the vehicle can carry,which also reduces the maximumallowable trailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balancemust be maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% of the loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailertypes, such as boat trailers, falloutside of this range. Always referto the trailer owner’s manual for therecommended trailer tongue weight



for each trailer. Never exceed themaximum loads for your vehicle,hitch and trailer.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue to see if the weights areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to transfer some of thecargo into your vehicle. If the trailertongue weight is too high or too low,it may be possible to rearrangesome of the cargo inside of thetrailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more than

half of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by,and rough roads can affect thetrailer and the hitch.

Proper hitch equipment for yourvehicle helps maintain combinationcontrol. Many trailers can be towedusing a weight-carrying hitch whichhas a coupler latched to the hitchball, or a tow eye latched to a pintlehook. Other trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight between your vehicleand trailer axles. See “TrailerTongue Weight” under TrailerTowing 0 275 or weight limits withvarious hitch types.

Never attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches. Only useframe-mounted hitches that do notattach to the bumper.

Always seal any holes in yourvehicle if the trailer hitch removed.If not sealed, dirt, water, and carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustmay enter your vehicle. See EngineExhaust 0 228.

Hitch Cover

To remove hitch cover, if equipped:

1. Remove the two fasteners onthe lower tabs.



2. Pull the lower edge of thecover to about a 45 degreeangle.

3. Pull the cover downward todisengage the upperattachments.

To reinstall hitch cover:

1. Hold cover at a 45 degreeangle to the vehicle and pushthe upper tabs into the slots inthe bumper.

2. Push the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward.

4. Reinstall the two fasteners onthe lower tabs

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendationsand instructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

1. Front of Vehicle

2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure the front fenderheight distance (2) beforeconnecting the trailer. Adjust thespring bars until the front fenderheight distance (2) is the sameheight before the trailer wasconnected. Do not reduce the frontfender height below the initialdistance (2).

Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire on thevehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing atrailer. See Tires 0 319 forinstructions on proper tireinflation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer, and attachthe chains to the holes on the trailerhitch platform. Instructions aboutsafety chains may be provided bythe hitch manufacturer or by thetrailer manufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the roadif it becomes separated from thehitch. Always leave just enoughslack so the combination can turn.Never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.



Trailer Brakes

Loaded trailers over 450 kg(1,000 lb) must be equipped withbrake systems and with brakes foreach axle. Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

State or local regulations mayrequire trailers to have their ownbraking system if the loaded weightof the trailer exceeds certainminimums that can vary from stateto state. Read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly. Never attemptto tap into your vehicle's hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both thevehicle anti-lock brakes and thetrailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Trailer Wiring Harness

lf equipped, the trailer wiringharness, with a 7-pin connector ismounted on the trailer hitch.

1. Left Turn/Brake

2. Tail Lamps

3. Reverse Lamps

4. Battery feed

5. Right Turn/Brake

6. Electric Brakes

7. Ground

If the vehicle is not equipped with atrailer connector on the trailer hitch,a 7-wire trailering harness is tied tothe vehicles frame. The harnessrequires the installation of a trailerconnector, which is availablethrough your dealer.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specificationsfor proper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

Stop/TurnSignal Left

Yellow/Gray

Stop/TurnSignal Right

Green/Violet

Tail/ParkingLamps

Gray/Brown

Reverse Lamps White/Green

Battery Feed Red/Green

Ground Black

Electric TrailerBrake

Blue

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

If equipped, (4) blunt-cut wires arelocated near the driver's feet for anaftermarket electric trailer brake



controller as part of the trailer wiringpackage. The harness contains thefollowing circuits:

Electric TrailerBrakes

Blue

Battery FeedRed/Black orRed/Blue

Brake ApplySignal White/Blue

Ground Black

Refer to the aftermarket electrictrailer brake controller owner'smanual to determine wire colorcoding of the electric trailer brakecontroller. The wire colors on thebrake controller may be differentfrom the vehicle. It may benecessary to have a technicianconnect the 12-volt power to theengine compartment fuse block. Theelectric trailer brake controllershould be installed by your dealer ora qualified service center.

Trailer Lamps

Always check all trailer lamps areworking at the beginning of eachtrip, and periodically on longer trips.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals should will illuminate toindicate the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping. Whentowing a trailer, the arrows on theinstrument cluster will illuminateeven if the trailer is not properlyconnected or the bulbs areburned out.

Tow/Haul Mode

For instructions on how to enterTow/Haul mode, see Driver ModeControl 0 239.

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 232.

Tow/Haul Mode is designed to bemost effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle's Gross

Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing 0 275.

Tow/Haul Mode is most useful whentowing a heavy trailer or carrying alarge or heavy load:

. through rolling terrain

. in stop-and-go traffic

. in busy parking lots

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or nottowing will not cause damage;however, it is not recommended andmay result in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC) have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintendedside-to-side motion of a trailer whiletowing. If the vehicle is towing atrailer and the TSC detects thatsway is increasing, the vehicle



brakes are selectively applied ateach wheel, to help reduceexcessive trailer sway. If equippedwith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, and thetrailer has an electric brake system,StabiliTrak/ESC may also apply thetrailer brakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak/ESC warning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Reduce vehiclespeed by gradually removing yourfoot from the accelerator. If trailersway continues, StabiliTrak/ESCcan reduce engine torque to help

slow the vehicle. TSC will notfunction if StabiliTrak/ESC is turnedoff. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 236.

{ Warning

Trailer sway can result in a crashand in serious injury or death,even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC.

If the trailer begins to sway,reduce vehicle speed bygradually removing your foot fromthe accelerator. Then pull over tocheck the trailer and vehicle tohelp correct possible causes,including an improperly oroverloaded trailer, unrestrainedcargo, improper trailer hitchconfiguration, or improperlyinflated or incorrect vehicle ortrailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 278 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Trailer Tires

Special Trailer (ST) tires differ fromvehicle tires. Trailer tires aredesigned with stiff sidewalls to helpprevent sway and to support heavyloads. These features can make itdifficult to determine if the trailer tirepressures are low only based on avisual inspection.

Always check all trailer tirepressures before each trip when thetires are cool. Low trailer tirepressure is a leading cause of trailertire blow-outs.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time.The trailer tire sidewall will show theweek and year the tire wasmanufactured. Many trailer tiremanufacturers recommendreplacing tires more than sixyears old.

Overloading is another leadingcause of trailer tire blow-outs. Neverload your trailer with more weightthan the tires are designed tosupport. The load rating is locatedon the trailer tire sidewall.



Always know the maximum speedrating for the trailer tires beforedriving. This may be significantlylower than the vehicle tire speedrating. The speed rating may be onthe trailer tire sidewall. If the speedrating is not shown, the defaulttrailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h(65 mph).

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check Engine

Light) 0 136. A device connectedto the DLC — such as anaftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 89 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 90.


284 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 285California Proposition

65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements . . . . . 286Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your Own

Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Engine Compartment

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 293Automatic Transmission

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 295Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 300Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Battery - North America . . . . . . 304All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 305Automatic Transmission Shift

Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 305

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 306Windshield Replacement . . . . . 307Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 309

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 310Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 310Engine Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Rear Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 321Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Tire Terminology and

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Tire Pressure for High-Speed

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Tire Pressure Monitor

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Different Size Tires and

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 339Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342


Vehicle Care 285

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 355

Jump StartingJump Starting - North

America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 359Recreational Vehicle

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, includingthis one, as well as many of itsservice parts and fluids, containand/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts andsystems, many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 304and Jump Starting - North America0 356 and the back cover.


286 Vehicle Care

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 90.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner’s manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 399.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 89.


Vehicle Care 287

If equipped with remote vehiclestart, open the hood beforeperforming any service work toprevent remote starting the vehicleaccidentally. See Remote VehicleStart 0 35.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 385.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It isunder the instrument panel onthe driver side of the vehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pullup on the center of the hood,and push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

3. After you have partially liftedthe hood, gas struts willautomatically take over to liftand hold the hood in the fullyopen position.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lowerthe hood until the lifting pressure ofthe strut is reduced. Then allow thehood to fall and latch into placeunder its own weight. Check tomake sure the hood is closed. If thehood does not fully latch, gentlypush the hood down at the front andcenter of the hood until it iscompletely latched.


288 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.5L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 289

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 295.

2. Engine Oil Fill Cap. SeeEngine Oil 0 291.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. SeeEngine Oil 0 291.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 296.

5. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid0 301.

6. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 303.

7. Battery - North America 0 304.

8. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 296.

9. Positive (+) Battery Terminal(Under Cover). See JumpStarting - North America 0 356.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 311.

11. Remote Negative (-) BatteryTerminal. See Jump Starting -North America 0 356.


290 Vehicle Care

3.6L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 291

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 295.

2. Engine Oil Fill Cap. SeeEngine Oil 0 291.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. SeeEngine Oil 0 291.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 296.

5. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid0 301.

6. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 303.

7. Battery - North America 0 304.

8. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 296.

9. Positive (+) Battery Terminal.See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 356.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 311.

11. Remote Negative (-) BatteryTerminal. See Jump Starting -North America 0 356.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 293.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 288 for the location.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check theoil level.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground.Check the engine oil level afterthe engine has been off for atleast two hours. Checking theengine oil level on steep gradesor too soon after engine shutoffcan result in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves when


292 Vehicle Care

checking a cold engine prior tostarting. Remove the dipstickand check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine iswarm, or at least 30 minutes ifthe engine is not warm. Pull outthe dipstick, wipe it with a cleanpaper towel or cloth, then push itback in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

2.5L L4 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick andthe engine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications 0 387.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

operating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 288 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 383.


Vehicle Care 293

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

For the 2.5L L4 engine, use SAE0W-20 viscosity grade engine oil.

For the 3.6L V6 engine, use SAE5W-30 viscosity grade engine oil.Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors which


294 Vehicle Care

include engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC.See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base and Midlevel)0 145 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 148.

2. Press and hold V on the DICwhile the Oil Life display isactive. The oil life will changeto 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 375, and be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 383.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage may

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 295

Caution (Continued)

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the correctautomatic transmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 383.

The transmission fluid will not reachthe end of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, take thevehicle to your dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 288 for location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule0 375.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

2.5L L4 Engine

1. Remove the five screws and liftthe cover out of the assembly.

2. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

3. Lower the cover and securewith the five screws.


296 Vehicle Care

3.6L V6 Engine

1. Remove the five screws and liftthe cover out of the assembly.

2. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

3. Lower the cover and securewith the five screws.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use cautionwhen working on the engine. Do

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present ifthe engine backfires.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

2.5L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap


Vehicle Care 297

3.6L V6 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan canstart up even when the engine isnot running and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts.They can be very hot and canburn you. Do not run the engine ifthere is a leak; all coolant couldleak out. That could cause anengine fire and can burn you. Fixany leak before driving thevehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant needs to bechecked and replaced atappropriate intervals. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 375.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 300.

What to Use

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts.They can be very hot and canburn you. Do not run the engine ifthere is a leak; all coolant couldleak out. That could cause anengine fire and can burn you. Fixany leak before driving thevehicle.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.


298 Vehicle Care. Helps keep the proper engine

temperature.

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM StandardGMW3420 and clean, drinkablewater. Anything else can causedamage to the engine coolingsystem and the vehicle, whichwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. See EngineOverheating 0 300.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 288.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engineparts can burn you. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.


Vehicle Care 299

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolantis not visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at or abovethe indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water

and DEX-COOL coolant. Be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that tostop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to theindicated level mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiatorhose getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theindicated level mark.


300 Vehicle Care

5. Replace the pressure captightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.

If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the systemcools down again, see yourdealer.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure thecap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of the engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 133.

The vehicle may also display amessage on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 394.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface. Thencheck to see if the engine coolingfan is running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of allcoolant and can damage thesystem and vehicle. Have anyleaks fixed right away.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.


Vehicle Care 301

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in theoverheated area, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 288 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

(Continued)


302 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or canbe heard all the time when thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 387.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.


Vehicle Care 303

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with GM approved DOT 3brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 288 forthe location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on alevel surface, the brake fluid levelshould be between the minimumand maximum marks on the brakefluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 138.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluidat the specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 375.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 383.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.


304 Vehicle Care

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed. Forreplacement of the battery, see yourdealer.

Stop/Start System

If equipped with the 2.5L L4 engine,the vehicle has a Stop/Start systemto shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. See Starting theEngine 0 223.

It has an Absorbed Glass Mat(AGM) 12-volt battery. Installation ofa standard 12-volt battery will resultin reduced 12-volt battery life.

When using a 12-volt batterycharger on the 12-volt AGM battery,some chargers have an AGMbattery setting on the charger.If available, use the AGM setting onthe charger, to limit charge voltageto 14.8 volts.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 285 and the backcover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 356 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


Vehicle Care 305

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

Under normal driving conditions,transfer case fluid does not requiremaintenance unless there is a fluidleak or unusual noise. If required,have the transfer case serviced byyour dealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.


306 Vehicle Care

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. For

proper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 384.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in themiddle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.


Vehicle Care 307

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To remove the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away fromthe window. The rear wiper armwill only lift off the glass at asmall angle to allow for wiperblade removal. The rear wiperarm will not lock in a service upposition so care should betaken when replacing the rearwiper blade.

2. Push the release lever todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm toward thecenter of the vehicle and out ofthe blade assembly.

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

Windshield Replacement

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to bereplaced and the vehicle isequipped with a front camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems, aGM replacement windshield isrecommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance inlifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full openposition.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold openthe hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail,you or others could be seriouslyinjured. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service immediately.Visually inspect the gas struts forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage periodically. Check tomake sure the hood/trunk/liftgateis held open with enough force.If struts are failing to hold thehood/trunk/liftgate, do notoperate. Have the vehicleserviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also donot push down or pull on gasstruts. This may cause damage tothe vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 375.


308 Vehicle Care

Hood

Trunk

Liftgate

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


Vehicle Care 309

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this section,contact your dealer.

Caution

Do not replace incandescentbulbs with aftermarket LEDreplacement bulbs. This cancause damage to the vehicleelectrical system.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly downto remove it from the liftgate.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socketand turn the bulb socketclockwise to install into thelamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly intothe liftgate, engaging the clipside first.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.


310 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuitbreakers. Use of an oversizedfuse or circuit breaker can resultin a vehicle fire. You and otherscould be seriously injured orkilled.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.


Vehicle Care 311

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is in theengine compartment, on the driverside of the vehicle.

Caution

Do not pull the enginecompartment fuse block lever,since it is intended only forservice purposes. If pulled,vehicle malfunction may occur.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove the fuse block cover,press the clips on the cover and liftit straight up.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


312 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F1 Antilock brakesystem

F2 Starter 1

F3 DC DC transformer 1

F4 –

F5 –

F6 –

F7 DC DC transformer 2

F8 Starter 3

F9 –

F10 –

F11 –

F12 Front wiper

F13 Starter 2

F14 LED/Automaticheadlamp leveling

F15 Rear wiper 1

F16 –

F17 –

F18 Automatic headlampleveling module


Vehicle Care 313

Fuses Usage

F19 –

F20 –

F21 –

F22 Electronic brakecontrol module

F23 Parking/Trailerlamps

F24 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

F25 Steering column lock

F26 –

F27 Left trailer stoplamp/Turn signal lamp

F28 –

F29 –

F30 Washer pump

F31 Headlamp low-beamright

F32 Headlamplow-beam left

F33 Fog lamps

Fuses Usage

F34 Horn

F35 –

F36 Headlamphigh-beam left

F37 Headlamphigh-beam right

F38 Automatic headlampleveling motor

F39 Transmission controlmodule 1

F40 Left rear buselectrical center/Ignition

F41 Instrument cluster

F42 Heating, ventilation,and air conditioning

F43 Head-up display

F44 –

F45 –

F46 –

F47 –

F48 Rear wiper 2

Fuses Usage

F49 Interior rearviewmirror/Trailer

F50 Fuel system controlmodule

F51 Heated steeringwheel

F52 Air conditioningclutch

F53 Transmission rangecontrol module

F54 Coolant pump

F55 –

F56 –

F57 Engine controlmodule/Ignition

F58 Transmission controlmodule/Ignition

F59 Engine controlmodule battery

F60 Transmission controlmodule 2

F61 O2 sensor 1/Aeroshutter


314 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F62 Engine controlmodule – odd

F63 O2 sensor 2

F64 Engine controlmodule – even

F65 Engine controlmodule powertrain 1

F66 Engine controlmodule powertrain 2

F67 Powertrain TRCM

F68 –

F69 –

F70 –

F71 –

F72 –

F73 –

F74 –

F75 –

F76 –

F77 –

Relays Usage

K1 Starter 1

K2 Run/Crank

K3 Starter 3

K4 LED/Automaticheadlamps

K5 –

K6 Coolant pump

K7 Engine controlmodule

K8 Air conditioning

K9 –

K10 Starter 2

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block isinside the center console on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See the fuse block cover for specificfuse information.

Open the fuse panel door,or remove the panel from thepassenger side by pulling it out.


Vehicle Care 315

To reinstall the door, push the doorback into its original location.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

F1 Body controlmodule 6

F2 Diagnostic link/Central gatewaymodule

F3 Electric steeringcolumn lock

F4 –

F5 Logistics

F6 Heating,ventilation, and airconditioning


F8 Head-up display

F9 Front passengerheated seat

F10 Airbag/Seat belt

F11 Electronic precisionshift

F12 Amplifier



316 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F14 Driver heated seat

F15 Instrument panelswitch bank

F16 Sunroof


F18 Instrument cluster

F19 –

F20 Rear seatentertainment


F22 Infotainment USBdata/Aux jack


F24 USB charger/Wireless charging

F25 Park aid

F26 CIM

F27 Video

Fuses Usage

F28 Heating,ventilation, and airconditioningdisplay

F29 Radio

F30 Steering wheeladjustment controls

F31 Front blower

F32 DC AC inverter

F33 Driver power seat

F34 Passengerpower seat

F35 Battery IEC 1 feed

F36 Electric powersteering

F37 Rear seatentertainment/USBcharge/Wirelesscharging module


F39 –

CircuitBreakers

Usage

F40 –

F41 –

F42 Auxiliary poweroutlet/Lighter

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind a trim panel on the driverside of the rear storagecompartment.


Vehicle Care 317

Remove the side bin, load floor, andfoam. See Cargo ManagementSystem 0 114.

Remove the trim plate to access thefuse block.

The label for this fuse block is in thespare tire area, on the foam underthe cargo floor.

Fuses Usage

F1 –

F2 Trailer battery 1

Fuses Usage

F3 Driver seat beltmotor

F4 Rear blower

F5 Rear drive control

F6 Passenger seatbelt motor

F7 Right window

F8 Rear defogger

F9 Left window

F10 –

F11 Trailer reverse

F12 –

F13 –

F14 –

F15 –

F16 –

F17 Camera

F18 Trailer module

F19 Ventilated seats

F20 –


318 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F21 Trailer connector

F22 –

F23 –

F24 Passenger windowswitch

F25 –

F26 Trailer brake

F27 Driver ventilatedseat/Lumbar

F28 Passive entry/Passive start

F29 –

F30 Canister vent

F31 –

F32 Heated mirror

F33 –

F34 Liftgate module

F35 Fuel system controlmodule

F36 Passengerventilated seat/Lumbar

Fuses Usage

F37 –

F38 Window module

F39 Rear closure

F40 Memory seatmodule

F41 Automaticoccupancy sensor

F42 Trailer battery 2

F43 –

F44 –

F45 Liftgate motor

F46 Rear heated seats

F47 –

F48 Glass break sensor

F49 –

F50 –

F51 –

F52 Active dampeningsystem module

F53 Rear parking aidmodule/Video/USB

Fuses Usage

F54 External objectcalculating/Sideblind zone alert

F55 –

F56 Universal remotesystem/Rainsensor

F57 Theft deterrent

CircuitBreakers

Usage

CB1 –

CB2 –

CB3 Rear auxiliary poweroutlet

Relays Usage

K1 –

K2 –


Vehicle Care 319

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 217.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation 0 328 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.


320 Vehicle Care

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 320.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 335.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. It is recommendedthat winter tires be installed on thevehicle if frequent driving attemperatures below approximately5 °C (40 °F) or on ice or snowcovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires 0 320.


Vehicle Care 321

Caution

High performance summer tireshave rubber compounds that loseflexibility and may developsurface cracks in the tread areaat temperatures below −7 °C (20 °F). Always store highperformance summer tiresindoors and at temperaturesabove −7 °C (20 °F) when not inuse. If the tires have beensubjected to −7 °C (20 °F) or less,let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5 °C (40 °F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated airdirectly on the tires. Alwaysinspect tires before use. See TireInspection 0 333.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size : The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third


322 Vehicle Care

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature

resistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading 0 337.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only : Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven at

speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire 0 355 and If a Tire GoesFlat 0 341.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


Vehicle Care 323

(5) Tire Inflation : Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure0 326.

(6) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire


324 Vehicle Care

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 326.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 217.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 217.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 217.


Vehicle Care 325

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 217.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard.See Tire Pressure 0 326 andVehicle Load Limits 0 217.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.


326 Vehicle Care

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 335.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers using

government testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 337.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 217.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 217.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.(Continued)


Vehicle Care 327

Warning (Continued)

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 217.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire 0 355.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, no

further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.


328 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.This could cause a crash, andyou or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

Vehicles with 235/65R18, 235/55R20, 245/65R17, or 255/65R17size tires require inflation pressure

adjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) orhigher. Set the cold inflationpressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall,or 280 kPa (41 psi), whichever islower. Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed drivinghas ended.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 217 andTire Pressure 0 326.

The maximum load and inflationpressure is molded on the tiresidewall, in small letters, near therim flange. It will read something likethis: Maximum load690 kg (1,521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire


Vehicle Care 329

tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 329.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in

the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 217.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. For


330 Vehicle Care

additional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base and Midlevel)0 145 or Driver Information Center(DIC) (Uplevel) 0 148.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 217, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 326.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tire

maintenance. See Tire Inspection0 333, Tire Rotation 0 334 and Tires0 319.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM-approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 342 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 331. The TPMS sensor matching

process was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 335.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. Seeyour dealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turnsignal lamp will stop flashingand briefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Do notexceed the maximum pressurelisted on the tire sidewall.See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 321and Vehicle Load Limits 0 217.

If the tire is overinflated by morethan 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn willsound multiple times and the turnsignal lamp will continue to flash forseveral seconds after filling stops.To release and correct the pressure,while the turn signal lamp is stillflashing, briefly press the center of


332 Vehicle Care

the valve stem. When therecommended pressure is reached,the horn sounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers areon, the tire fill alert visual feedbackwill not work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tirefill alert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from theinflation device is not sufficientto inflate the tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in thehorn or turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use atire pressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear

tire. See your dealer for service orto purchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle in ServiceMode. See Ignition Positions0 221.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressureinfo page option is turned on.The info pages on the DIC canbe turned on and off throughthe Options menu.


Vehicle Care 333

See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base and Midlevel)0 145 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 148.

4. Use the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheelto scroll to the Tire Pressurescreen under the DICinfo page.

5. Press and hold V in the centerof the DIC controls.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC display.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.


334 Vehicle Care

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 375.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment.See When It Is Time for NewTires 0 335 and WheelReplacement 0 339.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.See Tire Pressure 0 326 andVehicle Load Limits 0 217.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 329.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 387.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 335

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining.See Tire Inspection 0 333 and TireRotation 0 334.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be free

of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of the


336 Vehicle Care

vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 321.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 334. However, if it is

necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,


Vehicle Care 337

load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 328.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 217.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, traction

control, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 335 andAccessories and Modifications0 286.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


338 Vehicle Care

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the

norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,


Vehicle Care 339

underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.


340 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

If the vehicle has a tire size otherthan 235/65R18, do not use tirechains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amountof clearance can cause damageto the brakes, suspension,or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cause loss of control and a crash.Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels. Iftraction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

Caution

If the vehicle is equipped with235/65R18 size tires, use tirechains only where legal and onlywhen necessary. Use low profilechains that add no more than12 mm thickness to the tire treadand inner sidewall. Use chains

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

that are the proper size for thetires. Install them on the tires ofthe front axle. Do not use chainson the tires of the rear axle.Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 341

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 319. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if there is ever a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used for

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

anything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 168.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

(Continued)


342 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing 0 349. Touse the tire sealant and compressorkit, see Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 342.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust may

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

enter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust 0 228.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.


Vehicle Care 343

{ Warning

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire or tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate anunderinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tire

sealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 394.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve2. Sealant/Air Hose3. Base of Sealant Canister4. Tire Sealant Canister5. On/Off Button6. Slot on Top of Compressor7. Pressure Deflation Button8. Pressure Gauge

9. Power Plug10. Air Only Hose

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe tire sealant canister (4).

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the tire sealant canister.The tire sealant canister (4) shouldbe replaced before its expirationdate. Replacement tire sealantcanisters are available at your localdealer.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the tire sealantcanister must be replaced.


344 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 168.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 341 forother important safety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealantcanister (4) and compressorfrom its storage location. SeeStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 348.

2. Remove the air only hose (10)and the power plug (9) from thebottom of the compressor.

3. Place the compressor on theground near the flat tire.

4. Attach the air only hose (10) tothe sealant canister inletvalve (1) by turning it clockwiseuntil tight.

5. Slide the base of the tiresealant canister (3) into the sloton the top of the compressor(6) to hold it upright.

Make sure the tire valve stemis positioned close to theground so the hose willreach it.

6. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.


Vehicle Care 345

7. Attach the sealant/air hose (2)to the tire valve stem by turningit clockwise until tight.

8. Plug the power plug (9) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets 0 124.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

10. Press the on/off button (5) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (8) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushesthe sealant into the tire. Oncethe sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, thepressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (8). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure 0 326.

The pressure gauge (8) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor

is on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 394.

12. Press the on/off button (5) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire.


346 Vehicle Care

Therefore, Steps 13–21 mustbe done immediately afterStep 12.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

13. Unplug the power plug (9) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

15. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

16. Remove the tire sealantcanister (4) from the slot on topof the compressor (6).

17. Turn the air only hose (10)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire sealant canisterinlet valve (1).

18. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)clockwise onto the sealantcanister inlet valve (1) toprevent sealant leakage.

19. Return the air only hose (10)and power plug (9) back totheir original storage location.

20. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location.

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.

21. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

22. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

23. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–10 under “Using the

Tire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 394.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

24. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, or vehicle.

25. Dispose of the used tiresealant canister (4) at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

26. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.


Vehicle Care 347

27. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

The kit includes:

1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve2. Sealant/Air Hose3. Base of Sealant Canister

4. Tire Sealant Canister5. On/Off Button6. Slot on Top of Compressor7. Pressure Deflation Button8. Pressure Gauge

9. Power Plug10. Air Only Hose

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 168.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 341 forother important safety warnings.

1. Remove the compressor fromits storage location. SeeStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 348.

2. Remove the air only hose (10)and the power plug (9) from thebottom of the compressor.

3. Place the compressor on theground near the flat tire.

Make sure the tire valve stemis positioned close to theground so the hose willreach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (10) tothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until tight.

6. Plug the power plug (9) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets 0 124.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.


348 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Press the on/off button (5) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (8). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure 0 326.

The pressure gauge (8) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressure

reading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 394.

10. Press the on/off button (5) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thecompressor as it could bewarm after usage.

11. Unplug the power plug (9) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the air only hose (10)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (10)and power plug (9) back totheir original storage location.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas accessory adapters located in acompartment on the bottom of itshousing that can be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis in a bag in the rear compartmentstorage area.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate0 41.


Vehicle Care 349

2. Lift the load floor.

3. Remove the cargomanagement system. SeeCargo Management System0 114.

4. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise to remove thetire sealant and compressorkit bag.

5. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from the bag.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:



3. Remove the cargomanagement system. SeeCargo Management System0 114.


350 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the wing nut (3)counterclockwise to remove thejack (1) and wheel wrench (2).Place the tool container nearthe tire being changed.

5. Remove the spare tire andplace it next to the tire beingchanged.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 341.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest theflat tire.

The jacking location isindicated by a half circle notchin the metal flange. The jackmust not be used in any otherposition.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured or

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 351

Warning (Continued)

killed. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided with

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

Caution

Using a jack to raise the vehiclewithout positioning it correctlycould damage your vehicle. Whenraising your vehicle on a jack, besure to position it correctly underthe frame and avoid contact withthe plastic molding.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the jack lifthead until the slots in the jackhead fit into the metal flangebehind the cut out on theplastic molding. Do not raisethe vehicle yet.

6. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

7. Turn the wrench clockwise inthe jack to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so that there isenough room for the spare tireto fit under the wheel well.


352 Vehicle Care

8. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

13. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer when

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 353

Warning (Continued)

using accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 387 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 387 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

15. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all six plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


354 Vehicle Care

Storing the Flat Tire

1. Liftgate Hinges2. Cable3. Center of the Wheel4. Door Striker

To store the flat tire:

1. Remove the cable packagefrom under the spare tire, jack,and tools.

2. Remove the small cap bytapping the back of the capwith the extension of the shaft,if the vehicle has aluminumwheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valvestem facing the rear of thevehicle.

4. Pull the cable through the doorstriker and the center of thewheel.

5. Hook the cable onto theoutside portion of the liftgatehinges.

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other sideof the vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sureit is secure.


Vehicle Care 355

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Pushthe tube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and makesure it is fully latched.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Storing the Compact SpareTire and Tools

To store the spare tire and tools:



3. Remove the cargomanagement system.

4. Put back the spare tire and alltools as they were stored in therear storage compartment.

5. Install the cargo managementsystem and load floor.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h (50mph). To conserve the tread of thespare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.


356 Vehicle Care

Performance of the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system will beautomatically reduced to protect thesystem when using the compactspare. To restore the AWD andprevent excessive wear on theclutch in the AWD, replace thecompact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as possible.

Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 304.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTER

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 357

Warning (Continued)

HANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 285 and the backcover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Discharged BatteryPositive (+) Terminal

2. Discharged Battery RemoteNegative (-) Terminal

3. Good Battery Negative (-)Terminal

4. Good Battery Positive (+)Terminal

The jump start positive (+)Terminal (1) and the negativeremote negative terminal (2) for thedischarged battery are on the driverside of the vehicle.

The jump start positive (+)terminal (4) and negative (-)terminal (3) are on the battery of thevehicle providing the jump start.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles sothat they are not touching.


358 Vehicle Care

3. Set the parking brake firmlyand put the shift lever inP (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. SeeShifting Into Park 0 226.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition off. Turn off alllights and accessories in bothvehicles, except the hazardwarning flashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of thegood battery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to theremote negative (–) terminal forthe discharged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.


Vehicle Care 359

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to suspensioncomponents. Use the properstraps around the tires to securethe vehicle. Do not drag a lockedwheel/tire while loading thevehicle. Do not use a sling typelift to tow the vehicle. This coulddamage the vehicle.

GM recommends a flatbed tow truckto transport a disabled vehicle. Useramps to help reduce approachangles, if necessary. A towedvehicle should have its drive wheelsoff the ground. Contact RoadsideAssistance or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped withspecific attachment points to beused by the towing provider. Theseholes may be used to pull thevehicle from a flat road surface ontothe flatbed tow truck.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing are


360 Vehicle Care

known as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. Before towing the vehicle,become familiar with the locallaws that apply to recreationalvehicle towing. These laws mayvary by region.

. The towing capacity of thetowing vehicle. Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far the vehicle will betowed. Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. The proper towing equipment.See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. If the vehicle is ready to betowed. Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing (2.5L L4Engine)

This vehicle was not designed orintended to be dinghy towed.


Vehicle Care 361

Dinghy Towing (3.6LV6 Engine)

If the vehicle is front-wheel drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in thissection.

If the vehicle is all-wheel drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannot betowed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Remove the shift lever boot bypulling up on the rear of thetrim plate.

3. Use a small screwdriver or toolto press and hold the manualrelease button on the rear right.

4. Put the vehicle in N (Neutral).

Caution

If the vehicle is towed withoutperforming each of the stepslisted under “Dinghy Towing,” theautomatic transmission could bedamaged. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towingprocedure prior to and aftertowing the vehicle.

Caution

If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it couldbe damaged. Never exceed105 km/h (65 mph) while towingthe vehicle.


362 Vehicle Care

Once the destination has beenreached:

1. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).

2. Reinstall the shift lever boot byinserting the front edge andpressing the rear of the trimplate until it snaps into place.

3. Start the engine and let it idlefor more than three minutesbefore driving the vehicle.

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Besure that the transmission fluid isat the proper level before towingwith all four wheels on theground.

Caution

Do not tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if oneof the front tires is a compact

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

spare tire. Towing with twodifferent tire sizes on the front ofthe vehicle can cause severedamage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing

To tow a vehicle from the front withthe rear wheels on the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 226.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle fromthe Rear


Vehicle Care 363

Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 383.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Caution

Do not power wash anycomponent under the hood that

has thise symbol.

(Continued)


364 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer to

have the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 365

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.


366 Vehicle Care

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help increasefuel economy. Keep the shuttersystem clean for proper operation.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and

a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 383.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and chromewheel trim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium chloride orcalcium chloride. These are usedon roads for conditions such as

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 367

Caution (Continued)

dust and ice. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage onwheels and wheel trim, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drivethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash that uses siliconecarbide tire/wheel cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect

disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect allother brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properelectrical connections, binding,cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinges, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.


368 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately remove

hand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.


Vehicle Care 369

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth

to a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.


370 Vehicle Care

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 371

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with coldwater, and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Button Retainer


372 Vehicle Care

Some vehicles have floor mats witha button-type retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock each retainerand remove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snappinginto position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured in place.Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 373

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 373

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 375

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Additional Maintenanceand Care

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 385

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GMperformed on the vehicle. Theuse of flushes, solvents, cleaners,or lubricants that are notapproved by GM could damagethe vehicle, requiring expensiverepairs that are not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


374 Service and Maintenance

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 217.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 268.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

have a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 286.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 291.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 326.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 333.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 301.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil and

filter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 293.

Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years.This service requires replacement ofthe desiccant to help the longevityand efficient operation of the airconditioning system. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 334.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 291 andEngine Oil Life System 0 293.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 296.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 301.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 326.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 333.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 295.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 363.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage,including cracks or tears in therubber boots, loose or missing



parts, or signs of wear at leastonce a year. See Exterior Care0 363.

. Inspect power steering forproper attachment, connections,binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts anddrive shafts for excessive wear,lubricant leaks, and/or damageincluding: tube dents or cracks,constant velocity joint oruniversal joint looseness,cracked or missing boots, looseor missing boot clamps, centerbearing excessive looseness,loose or missing fasteners, andaxle seal leaks.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 77.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 363.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 305.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 305.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 305.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. If the holdopen ability is low, service thegas strut. See Gas Strut(s)0 307.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 342.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 53.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12

00

0k

m/7

,50

0m

i

24

00

0k

m/1

5,0

00

mi

36

00

0k

m/2

2,5

00

mi

48

00

0k

m/3

0,0

00

mi

60

00

0k

m/3

7,5

00

mi

72

00

0k

m/4

5,0

00

mi

84

00

0k

m/5

2,5

00

mi

96

00

0k

m/6

0,0

00

mi

10

80

00

km

/67

,50

0m

i

12

00

00

km

/75

,00

0m

i

13

20

00

km

/82

,50

0m

i

14

40

00

km

/90

,00

0m

i

15

60

00

km

/97

,50

0m

i

16

80

00

km

/10

5,0

00

mi

18

00

00

km

/11

2,5

00

mi

19

20

00

km

/12

0,0

00

mi

20

40

00

km

/12

7,5

00

mi

21

60

00

km

/13

5,0

00

mi

22

80

00

km

/14

2,5

00

mi

24

00

00

km

/15

0,0

00

mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (7) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 296.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 303.

(7) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 306



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12

00

0k

m/7

,50

0m

i

24

00

0k

m/1

5,0

00

mi

36

00

0k

m/2

2,5

00

mi

48

00

0k

m/3

0,0

00

mi

60

00

0k

m/3

7,5

00

mi

72

00

0k

m/4

5,0

00

mi

84

00

0k

m/5

2,5

00

mi

96

00

0k

m/6

0,0

00

mi

10

80

00

km

/67

,50

0m

i

12

00

00

km

/75

,00

0m

i

13

20

00

km

/82

,50

0m

i

14

40

00

km

/90

,00

0m

i

15

60

00

km

/97

,50

0m

i

16

80

00

km

/10

5,0

00

mi

18

00

00

km

/11

2,5

00

mi

19

20

00

km

/12

0,0

00

mi

20

40

00

km

/12

7,5

00

mi

21

60

00

km

/13

5,0

00

mi

22

80

00

km

/14

2,5

00

mi

24

00

00

km

/15

0,0

00

mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (7) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed if

driving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, window

fogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.



(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 296.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 303.

(7) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 306

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 363.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.


Service and Maintenance 381. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 383 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 368 andExterior Care 0 363.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Cooling System 0 296.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil0 291.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, inCanada 19299819).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orequivalent.

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.5L L4 Engine 23321606 A3212C

3.6L V6 Engine 15278634 A3083C

Engine Oil Filter

2.5L L4 Engine 12640445 PF64

3.6L V6 Engine 19330000 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13508023 CF185

Spark Plugs

2.5L L4 Engine 12627160 41-115

3.6L V6 Engine 12646780 41-130

Wiper Blades

Front Driver – 60 cm (24 in) 23372088 —

Front Passenger – 50 cm (20 in) 23360287 —

Rear – 30 cm (12 in) 23299093 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


386 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle Identification

Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Service Parts Identification

Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Vehicle DataCapacities and

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 389

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacement

parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 387 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThere may be a label in the rearcompartment, under the load floor,inside the cargo storage shelf unit,that contains the followinginformation:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is abarcode on the certification label onthe center (B) pillar to scan for thissame information.


Technical Data 387

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 383 for more information.

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

2.5L L4 Engine 9.2 L 9.7 qt

2.5L L4 Engine - with rear HVAC 10.7 L 11.3 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 11.4 L 12.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine - with rear HVAC 12.9 L 13.7 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.5L L4 Engine FWD 4.7 L 5.0 qt

2.5L L4 Engine AWD 5.7 L 6.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt


388 Technical Data

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Fuel Tank

FWD 73.4 L 19.4 gal

AWD 82.1 L 21.7 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.0 L 1.0 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.5L L4 Engine A Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

3.6L V6 Engine S Automatic 0.80–0.90 mm (0.031–0.035 in)


Technical Data 389

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.5L L4 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine


390 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer Satisfaction

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Customer Assistance

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 393Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 393GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Roadside Assistance

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Scheduling Service

Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Courtesy Transportation

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 397Publication Ordering

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Radio Frequency

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to

the United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 402OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 403

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 391

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One



and Two, General Motors of CanadaCompany wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of CanadaCompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.gmc.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manualsand view vehicle-specific how-tovideos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers,and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 386.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXMSatellite radio (if equipped), andOnStar account information (ifequipped).

F : Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

See my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Centre (Canada)www.gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Use the Vehicle Tools section.

. Access third party enthusiastsites and social media networks.

. Locate resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner’s manualfor your vehicle, quickly andeasily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement, up to certain limits,of eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for the vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility program. See www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE(800-463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.


Customer Information 395. Lock-Out Service: Service to

unlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warranty

event, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 500 miles.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders are required.Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help tomake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,



after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”

furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs



and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.



Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 394.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number


Customer Information 399. Vehicle make, model, and

model year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 84.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengine, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electricalsystem, steering system, body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basicoperational information about thevehicle. The owner’s manualincludes the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase includeowner’s manuals, warrantymanuals, infotainment manuals, andportfolios. Portfolios include anowner’s manual, warranty manual,infotainment manual, if applicable,and zip lock bag or pouch.



Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withInnovation, Science and Economic

Development (ISED) Canada'sRSP-100 / license-exempt RSS's /ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510;go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations andRecalls Division80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

In the U.S., call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0812 or01-800-466-0801.

In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-722-236-0680.



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar and has an active serviceplan, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 406.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


404 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar Additional

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paid serviceplan and data plan. OnStar requiresthe vehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar User

Terms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


OnStar 405

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive safety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.


406 OnStar

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover thevehicle.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar or connectedservices if the vehicle is disposedof, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStaror connected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles. For moreinformation, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar User Terms, PrivacyStatement, and Software Terms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


OnStar 407

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar or connected servicescannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where OnStar has anagreement with a wireless serviceprovider for service in that area. Thewireless service provider must alsohave coverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar orconnected services. Serviceinvolving location information aboutthe vehicle cannot work unless GPSsignals are available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar or connectedservices may not work if the OnStarequipment is not properly installedor it has not been properlymaintained. If equipment or softwareis added, connected, or modified,OnStar or connected services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damage

to the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpwith physical disabilities andmedical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicle

access to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.


408 OnStar

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for 10 dayswithout an ignition cycle. If thevehicle has not been started for10 days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 283. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data or


OnStar 409

settings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned that

the privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, use


410 OnStar

or other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with the

distribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”


OnStar 411

without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use ofthe Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


412 Connected Services

ConnectedServices

Connected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specificOnStar or connected service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For somevehicles, press= to open the

OnStar app on the infotainmentdisplay. For other vehicles press=as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat



Connected Services 413

2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwordsfor the Wi-Fi hotspot andmyGMC mobile application.Make these passwords differentfrom each other and use acombination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier).This is your network’s name thatis visible to other wirelessdevices. Choose a unique nameand avoid family names orvehicle descriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, thenselect Wi-Fi Hotspot. On somevehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-FiSettings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor. On some


414 Connected Services

vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed inthe Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobiledevices. Manage data usage byturning Wi-Fi on or off on yourmobile device, using the myGMCmobile app, or by contacting anOnStar Advisor. On some vehicles,Wi-Fi can also be managed from theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myGMC mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. GMC users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with GMC on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyGMC mobile app information andcompatibility, see my.gmc.com.

An active OnStar or connectedservice plan may be required.A compatible device,factory-installed remote start, and

power locks are required. Data ratesapply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers onyour route, help locate hotels,or book a room. These servicesvary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service,which requires available minutes.Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press=to open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For othervehicles press= as follows.


Connected Services 415

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle's key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.Features are subject to change. Forupdates on feature capabilities, seemy.gmc.com. Message and datarates may apply.

GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/-Mexico-12146149) - 2019 - crc - 3/27/18

416 Index

Index AAccessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 243Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 283Additional Information

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Additional Maintenance

and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Adjustments

Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .59Agreements

Trademarks and License . . . . . 196Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 295Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .198, 201Air Filter, Passenger

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Airbag System

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91How Does an Airbag

Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Passenger Sensing System . . . .85What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83What Will You See after an

Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Airbag System (cont'd)When Should an Airbag

Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .80

AirbagsAdding Equipment to the

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90Passenger Status Indicator . . . 135Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Servicing Airbag-Equipped

Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 263

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 305AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Antenna

Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 233

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Appearance Care

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368


Index 417

Apple CarPlay andAndroid Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Assistance Program,

Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Assistance Systems for

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Assistance Systems for

Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 253Audio

Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 174Auto Stop

Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Automatic

Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Shift Lock Control Function

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Auxiliary

Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

BBattery

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Battery - North America . . . .304, 356Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 306Bluetooth

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 189Brake

Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 138

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Braking SystemFront Pedestrian (FPB) . . . . . . . 261

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 221Bulb Replacement

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 309

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122California

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .285, 304, 356,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities and

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Management System . . . . . . . . . .114Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 112Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 136Check

Engine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


418 Index

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .93Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 108Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Cleaning

Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 397Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Compartments

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . 342Connected Services

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 413

ControlHill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Traction and Electronic

Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Control Light

Hill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Coolant

Engine Temperature Gauge . . 133Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 201Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Courtesy Transportation

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Cover

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . 243Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Text Telephone (TTY)

Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Customer InformationPublications Ordering

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Customer Satisfaction

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 397Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data Collection

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 403OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 402Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Devices

Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Diagnostics

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 415Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Door

Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39


Index 419

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 389Drive Systems

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 233, 305Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 251Driver Information

Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 148Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Driving

Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 257Characteristics and

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .26Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 215If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 217Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 208Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 217Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . 234Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . 139

Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 310Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Rear Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Emergency

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Check Light (Malfunction

Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 288Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Engine (cont'd)Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 229Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 402Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 164Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 166Exterior Lighting Battery

Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

FFeatures

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12Filter,

Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 295Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 168Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Fluid

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 294Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301


420 Index

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . 259Forward Collision Alert

(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Frequency Statement

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Front Fog Lamp

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Front Pedestrian Braking

(FPB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Front Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . .64

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Filling a Portable Fuel

Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 143Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 310Instrument Panel Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Rear Compartment Fuse

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Gauges

Engine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Warning Lights and

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126General Information

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 373Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 168Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Headlamps

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 144High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 166Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 144

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 201


Index 421

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 144High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 328Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 215Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 238Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . . 140Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 235Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120How to Wear Seat Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 201

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Indicator

Pedestrian Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . 399

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 50Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - North

America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

KKeyless Entry

Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .29Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 321Lamps

Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 166Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Exterior Lighting Battery

Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Malfunction Indicator

(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . 264Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 266

Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 140Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74LATCH System

Replacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Lighting

Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 169LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 138Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Check Engine (Malfunction

Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 139Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 142Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144


422 Index

Lights (cont'd)High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 166Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . 140Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 134Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Service Electric Parking

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 143Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

MMaintenance

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Maintenance and Care

Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 375

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 136Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Messages

Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Automatic Dimming

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Mirrors (cont'd)Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 50Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Monitor System, Tire

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

NNavigation

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 412New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 221

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 293Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 91Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 393OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403OnStar Additional

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406


Index 423

OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Operation

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 176

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

PPark

Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Parking

Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 305

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 228

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 253

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 85

Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . 141Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California . . . . . . 286Personalization

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Phone

Apple CarPlay andAndroid Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 189Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

PortUSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 226Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 76Privacy

Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 402Program

Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . 396Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .285, 304, 356,

Back CoverPublication Ordering

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 400Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Radios

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Rear Climate Control System . . . 201Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 253Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 121Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .50Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Recommended

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383


424 Index

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 359Reimbursement Program,

GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Replacement Parts

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 91Replacing LATCH System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Replacing Seat Belt System

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 401General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Roads

Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 389Running the Vehicle While

Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

SSafety Defects Reporting

Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 401General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 396Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77How to Wear Seat Belts

Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .78

Seat Belts (cont'd)Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .76

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Heated and Ventilated Front . . . .64Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .59Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .59Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .59Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 108

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Accessories and

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 286Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 385Maintenance, General

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Parts Identification Label . . . . . 386


Index 425

Service (cont'd)Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 396

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Shift Lock Control Function

Check, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 263Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Spare Tire

Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Special Application Services . . . . 380Specifications and

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131StabiliTrak

OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 35Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Storage

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Storage Areas

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Cargo Management System . . .114Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 111Storing the Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Struts

Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

SystemForward Collision

Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 403Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 393Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 48

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326, 328Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Pressure Monitor Operation . . 329


426 Index

Tires (cont'd)Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 328Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Sealant and

Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Sealant and Compressor

Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Terminology and Definitions . . 324Uniform Tire Quality

Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 339When It Is Time for New

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 140Towing

Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 271Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278General Information . . . . . . . . . . 271Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 359Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Towing (cont'd)Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 281Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

TractionControl System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . 142Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 281Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Turn and Lane-Change

Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 337Universal Remote System . . . . . . 160

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

UpdatesSoftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicle

Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Identification Number (VIN) . . . 386Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 140Vehicle Care

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 348

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Vehicle Data Recording and

Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52


Index 427

WWarning

Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 138Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 265

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance . . 339Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 97Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Windshield

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 306Wipers

Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

2019 Acadia/Acadia Denali

Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner’s Manual

84139730 Agmc.com (U.S.)gmccanada.ca (Canada)

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_GMC_Acadia_AcadiaDenali_COV_en_US_84139730A_2018APR13.ai 1 4/4/2018 1:02:16 PM19_GMC_Acadia_AcadiaDenali_COV_en_US_84139730A_2018APR13.ai 1 4/4/2018 1:02:16 PM

2019-acadia.pdf - Owners Manual - Dealer E Process

Documents

Transcript of 2019-acadia.pdf - Owners Manual - Dealer E Process